Oldsmobile Aurora 2003 Owner's Manual

Oldsmobile Aurora 2003 Owner's Manual
The 2003 Oldsmobile Aurora Owner Manual
SeatsandRestraintSystems
...........................
1-1
Front
Seats
............................................... 1-2
Safety Belts ..............................................
4 -8
Child Restraints .......................................
1-28
Air
Bag
Systems
......................................
1-47
............................
1-55
Restraint
System
Check
Features and Controls .....................................
2-1
Keys ........................................................ 2-3
DoorsandLocks
......................................
2-10
Windows .................................................
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................
2-19
StartingandOperatingYour
Vehicle
........... 2-23
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
[email protected]
......................................
2-39
[email protected]
Transmitter
.............................
2-41
Storage
Areas
......................................... 2-45
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-47
venicie Personaiization
.............................
2-48
Instrument Panel .............................................
3-1
..........................
3-2
InstrumentPanelOverview
Climate Controls
......................................
3-23
WarningLights,Gages
and Indicators ......... 3-30
D!%%?r !!?formatior! Center (D!C)
.................. u
12-AK
Audio
System(s)
.......................................
3-59
-rJ
4-1
Driving Your Vehicle .......................................
Your Driving. the Road.andYour
Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
...................................................
4-33
Service and Appearance Care ..........................
5-1
5-3
Service ............................... ;. ....................
Fuel .........................................................
5-5
Checking Things Under
.............................................
5-12
the Hood
Headlamp
Aiming
.....................................
5-50
....................................
5-54
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
5-59
5-60
Tires
......................................................
5-82
.....................................
Appearance
Care
5-90
Vehicle Identification .................................
5-91
Electrical System ......................................
Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-100
.... 5-101
NormalMaintenanceReplacement
Parts
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance
Schedule
................................
6-2
7-1
Customer AssistanceInformation ....................
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
............................ 7-8
Reporting Safety Defects
a
lnQex ................................................................. 1
=
I - - -I
~
~
i I I
I
I
Canadian Owners
I
I
GM
m
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
OLDSMOBILE, the OLDSMOBILE Rocket Emblem and
the AURORA emblem are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation. “AURORA is used with the
permission of Hankook Tire.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Oldsmobile Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U S A .
Part No. 25735873 A First Edition
‘I
OCopyright General Motors Corporation 06/19/02
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
You will find a number of safety cautions in thisbook.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
I
I
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
I
I
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used
on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
“Engine CompartmentOverview”
“Instrument Panel Overview”
“Climate Controls”
“Audio Systems”
Also see Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators on
page 3-30.
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PROTECT
OCCUPANT
DONOTTWIST SAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
*&:@
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
B-
- ,
LIGHTING
MASTER
SWITCH /
TURN
SIGNALS
CAUSTIC
BATERY
4ClD COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
MOVE SEAT
FULLY
REARWARD+
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
\!$%
LAMPS
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
\
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
@e
P=-
ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
d
COOLANT
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAlTERY
DO NOT INSTALL A
I'ORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
COMPLETELY
rHEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT
1
'
1
L
ruvven
WINDOW
I
l.fJ
/
z
PULL BELT
AVO ID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
ACCESS
"tl
9 1
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
i{{o
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
9%
OWNERS
MANUAL
SERVICE
n
1
CC!?'!!CE
MANUAL
Q
b NOTES
VI
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Manual Passenger Seat ..................................
1-2
Power Seats .................................................. 1.2
Manual Lumbar .............................................. 1.3
Power Lumbar ............................................... 1-4
Heated Seats ................................................. 1.5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-5
Head Restraints ............................................. 1-7
Safety Belts ..................................................... 1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
.................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................. 1-13
Driver Position .............................................. 1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .................. 1-20
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1-21
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. .l -21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ....................................... 1-25
Where to Put the Restraint .............................
Top Strap ....................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................
1-37
1.38
1-39
1.40
1-42
1-42
1.44
1-97
Air Bag Systems ............................................ 1-47
Where Are the Air Bags? ............................... 1-49
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-51
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-52
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-52
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates? ...1-52
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-54
Child Restraints ............................................. 1-28
Older Children .............................................. 1.28
Infants and Young Children ............................ 1.30
Child Restraint Systems ..............
........1.34
Restraint System Check .................................. 1-55
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ...................................................... 1-56
Safety Relt Fxtender
1-1
Power Seats
Front Seats
Manual Passenger Seat
,
’
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
~
I
I
Pull up on the control bar located under the front of the
seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-2
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the driver’s front seat. The front passenger’s seat
may also have power seat controls located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To adjust the power seats, do the following:
Manual Lumbar
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat
cushion by pressing the forward edge of the control
up or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by pressing
the rear edge of the control up or down.
Move the seat forward or rearward by pressing the
control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Move the seat higher or lower by holding the whole
control up or down.
Vertical Control (Option): Move
the seatback into a
reclined position by pressing the top of the control
backward.
Move the seatback forward by pressing the top of the
control forward.
If your vehicle has this feature, the knob that controls it
is located on the outboard side of the driver's seat.
Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase
Illmhar slyyrt Tlrrn the knnh toward the rear nf the
vehicle to decrease lumbar support.
If you have the independent front cushion moved down
as far as it will go, you may feel the lumbar support
higher in your back. Readjust the location of the cushion
until you are comfortable. You may also want to
adjust the seatback for maximum comfort.
1-3
Power Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power lumbar
control is located on
the outboard side of each
front seat. Use the
power seat control first to
get the proper position.
Then continue with
the lumbar adjustment.
To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar
control forward to increase support and rearward to
decrease support. Press the control up or down to raise
or lower the support mechanism.
1-4
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
If you have the independent front cushion moved down
as far as it will go, you may feel the lumbar support
higher in your back. Readjust the location of the cushion
until you are comfortable. You may also want to
adjust the seatback for maximum comfort.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
option, the heated seat
switch is located next
to the console shifter.
Push the ON part of the switch once for a HI setting or
twice for a LO setting. Push the OFF part of the
switch to turn the heated seat off. The LO setting warms
the seatback and cushion until the seat approximates
body temperature. TheHI setting heats the seatback
and cushlon to a srightiy nigner temperature.
If your vehicle has a power
recliner, the vertical control
described previously in
this section reclines
the front seatbacks.
If your vehicle has the manual recliner, lift the lever on
the outboard side of the seat and move the seatback
to the desired position. Release the lever to lock
the seatback. Pull up on the lever without pushing on
the seatback and the seatback will go to an upright
position.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. When the ignition is turned off, the heating
element is also turned off.
1-5
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety beltscan’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
I
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go intoit, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
For proper protection when the vehicle
is in
motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-7
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from
it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1 -8
_ _ is ext nely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in theseareas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.Do not
allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-33.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-9
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are
in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s truenot only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-30. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you’re in an
accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
\ J c ~3,ccide-d~
t
ccczr !!.ifhin 25 mi!es /An
km\
1 .- ‘ “ ‘ ‘ I
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-13
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-14
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Puli up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Q: What's wrong with this?
"N:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-16
Q: What's wrong with this?
You can be serious11 ]jured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would bethere, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriou I injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver orspleen.
L
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be s,..ously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 7-74.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt - except for one
thing. If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
1-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s
how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-22
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-24
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,
you can get it from any GM dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for olderchildren who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort
guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s
how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-25
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-26
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-27.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
- h ~, I,A - W
J I IUUIUGI .
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person
at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide. If the child is
sitting in a rear seat outside position, see Rear
Safety Beit Comfort Guides for Chiidren and Smaii
Adults on page 1-25.
1-29
Never do this.
I
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. Ifthe child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-30
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in avehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
--
1-31
Children who are up against, or very close
to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag systemis designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-32
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
child 1 withspecial needs.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head andneck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
c~mparpdwith the rest nf its body. In a crash?
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest partof an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed.A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-33
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant's head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
I----&-”
^..^ - s:.,- ”.-:-+
L,..“,-.,.,..,..
SUI I IG I I I Y I I-uaLn U U U ~ L C I 3caw I l a v c a I I V G - ~ W I I
1 ~ 3 5 .
1-:-.L.
L.--l,
---A-
L,
IL
I IUI I
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-35
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two
hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to
a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
1-36
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
A
.
A child in a rear-facing -..ild restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seatas
far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child
is in it.
1-37
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
1-38
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind
the rear seat on the filler panel.
In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open the trim
cover.
1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
U
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find
anchors (A) in all three rear seat positions.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors for this
child restraint system,
each seating position with
the LATCH system will
have a label sewn into the
seatback at each anchor
point.
1-40
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
I
I
If a LATCHty child restraint
isn’t attached to
its anchorage- points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect a child sitting there. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraintis
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System’’ or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” in
the Index for information on how to secure a
child restraint in your vehicle.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1 . Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-38. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
TO remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
i
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page1-40.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-38 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-42
EP- c
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
I -44
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat.
Here’s why:
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-38 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
f n l l n \ A / the instr~~dinns
that came with the child restraint
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Power Seats on page 1-2.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
clfnt\r
QulbLy
halt
U’CIIL
PII
~i,-Jfl\lif
yulu \ly
II
\/AI I
ywu
o
\rnr
uv-I
tn
hcaA
IlUU L W .
1-45
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-46
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags - a frontal air bag for the
driver, another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
You can be severely ,njured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt- even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Air bags are designe ,o work with safety belts
but don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal andnear frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,
or in many side crashes.And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful air bags have provided in
the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and
right front passenger are designed to inflate
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the sideof your vehicle. They
aren‘i ciesigneci to iniiaie in ironiai, in roiiover
or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety
belt properly - whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
1-47
Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its air bag systemis
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle.To read how, see the
part of this manual called “Older Children” or
“Infants and Young Children”.
Bot
rontal
and
l e impact E bags
inf
e
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air
bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Alwayswear your safety
belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far backas possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
I
I
1-48
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Lighton page 3-34.
Where Are the Air Bags?
II
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
ctnnrinry r r r h n n l
ut”-, I , 1y
,L,-,.
““I
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-49
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly orit
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on ornear any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-50
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level”.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph (18
to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment
is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level”. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-51
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
inside the steering wheel, the instrument panel, and the
side of the front seatbacks closest to the door.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
1-52
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module - the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver
and right front passenger‘s side impact air
bags - will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air
bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor doesit stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using ii~edoor iock ana inierior iamp conirois.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
with a crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records
speed, engine RPM, brake and throttle data.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
1-53
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-9.
1-54
or up to IO seco s aftertllition
y is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if youare close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sureto follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
so.
performing work for you is qualified to do
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keepa safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a C -ash
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need new
parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part about the air bag system
earlier in this manual.
1-56
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System ......................... 2.5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2.6
Doors and Locks ............................................ 2.10
Door Locks .................................................. 2-10
Central Door Unlocking System ...................... 2-1 1
Power Door Locks ........................................
2-1 1
Door Ajar Reminder ...................................... 2-1 1
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-1 1
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-12
Rear Door Security Locks .............................. 2-13
Lockout Protection ........................................ 2-14
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-14
Trunk .......................................................... 2-14
Windows ........................................................ 2-17
Power Windows ............................................ 2-18
Sun Visors ................................................... 2-18
Theft-Deterrent Svstems ................................. -2-19
Universal Theft-Deterrent ........
. . . . . . . .2-19
....2-21
[email protected] ...............................
....2-21
[email protected] Operation ....................
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................ 2.23
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 2.23
Ignition Positions .......................................... 2-23
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2-24
Engine Coolant Heater .................................. 2-25
Automatic Transaxle Operation ....................... 2-26
Parking Brake .............................................. 2-29
Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
....2-34
Mirrors .......................................................... -2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass ................................................. 2-35
Outside Power Mirrors ................................... 2-37
Guisiue Curb View Assist iviirror ..................... 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2-38
Outside Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-38
2- 1
Section 2
Features and Controls
[email protected] ..........
[email protected] .........................
[email protected] ........................
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
Storage Areas ......................................
Glove Box .........................................
Front StorageArea .............................
2-2
.....2.39
.........2.41
.........2.41
. .........2.42
.........2.45
.........2.45
......... 2.45
Assist Handles ....
Floor Mats ..........
Rear Storage Area ...
Convenience Net .....
............
Sunroof ........................
Vehicle Personalization .......................
MemorySeatandMirrors
..................
......2.45
......2.46
......2.46
......2.46
......2.47
......2.48
......2.48
Keys
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
The master key works in
all of the lock cylinders
(driver’s door, trunk,
ignition and glove box).
Your vehicle has the [email protected] vehicle theft
system. Both the master and VALET key have a
transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in
the vehicle’s steering column. If a replacement key
or any additional key is needed, you must purchase this
key from your dealer. The key will have [email protected] stamped
on it. Keep the bar code tag that came with the
original keys. Give this tag to your dealer if you need a
new key made.
Any new [email protected] key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key“
111 Operation on page2-21 for more information on
programming your new key.
The VALET key only
operates the driver’s door
and the ignition.
If your vehicle is equipped with the [email protected]
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, [email protected] be able to send a command
to unlock your vehicle. See OnStap System on
page 2-39 for more information.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
I . This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use h i s equipmeni.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors or
unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
&
(Unlock): The driver’s
door will unlock and the
exterior lights will flash
twice when this button is
pressed.
The numbers on the back of your transmitter correspond
to DRIVER #I and DRIVER #2 on the DIC. For more
information see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-45.
If the unlock button is pressed again within five seconds,
all doors will unlock, the exterior lamps will flash twice
and the horn may sound. See “Security Feedback later
in this section.
2-6
Pressing the unlock button will also illuminate the
interior lamps. See “Entry Lighting’’ under Interior Lamps
on page 3- 17.
8
(Lock): All doors will lock, the exterior lamps will
flash once and the horn may sound when this button is
pressed.
(Trunk): The trunk will unlock when this button is
pressed when the ignition is in OFF. This button will
also work when the ignition is on, but only while
the transaxle is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Personalization Features
The following list of features available on your vehicle
can be programmed to the driver’s preference for
each transmitter.
e
Automatic D O QLocks:
~
This feature programs
your door locks to automatically lock or unlock
when shifting in and out of PARK (P) or when the
key is turned to OFF.
e
Security Feedback: This feature provides feedback
to the driver when the vehicle receives a command
from the remote keyless entry transmitter.
e
Delayed Locking: This feature lets the driver delay
the actual locking of the vehicle. When all doors
have been closed, the doors will lock automatically
after five seconds.
e
Perimeter Lighting: When the unlock symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed,
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), parking lamps
and back-up lamps will turn on if it is dark enough
outside.
&
(Instant Alarm): When this button is pressed, the
horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps
will flash for up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by
pressing the button again, unlocking the vehicle with
a key or by turning the ignition on.
For more detailed information and programming
instructions for each feature mentioned, refer to DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52.
2-7
Security Feedback
This feature provides feedback to the driver when the
vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless
entry transmitter and all doors are closed.
You must program this feature through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-52.
The following settings can be programmed for each of
the remote keyless entry transmitters:
No feedback when locking or unlocking vehicle.
Parking lamps and the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) will flash twice when unlocking the vehicle
and flash once when locking the vehicle.
Horn chirps when all doors are unlocked (second
unlock button press) and when locking the vehicle.
Parking lamps and the DRL will flash twice
each time the button with the unlock symbol
is pressed; the horn chirps when all doors are
unlocked. Parking lamps and the exterior lamps
flash once and the horn chirps when locking
the vehicle.
2-8
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another
vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery, do the following:
1. Insert a coin, or similar object, into the notch near
the key ring. Turn it counterclockwise to separate
the two halves of the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
eraser to remove the old battery. Do not use a
metal object.
3. Replace the battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate. Use a Duracella battery,
type DL-2032, or a similar type.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-9
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
3-10
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or remote keyless
entry transmitter.
To unlock a door from the inside, move the manual door
lock control, located above the door handle, rearward.
To lock the door, move the manual door lock control
forward.
Central Door Unlocking System
Door Ajar Reminder
If the key is held in the outside key cylinder unlock
position for more than two seconds, all doors will unlock.
All doors will also unlock if the key is turned to the
unlock position twice within three seconds.
If a door is not fully closed when the transaxle is in
gear, a chime will sound and the DIC will display one of
these messages:
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, you
can lock or unlock all the
doors on your vehicle
using the driver’s or the
front passenger’s door lock
switch.
DRIVERSDOORAJAR
e
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
0
LEFTREARDOORAJAR
0
RIGHTREARDOORAJAR
Delayed Locking
This personalization feature lets the driver delay the
actual locking of the vehicle. When the driver’s power
door lock switch, or the lock symbol on the remote
keyless entry is pressed with the key removed from the
ignition and the driver’s door open, a chime will
sound three times to signal that the lock delay mode is
active. When all doors have been closed, the doors
will lock automatically after five seconds. If any door is
CpeEed b e k - e fhk, the fi\!e-secQnr_!timer \vi!! reset
itself once all the doors have been closed again.
Pressing the driver’s or passenger’s door lock switch or
the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry a second
time will override this feature.
You must program this feature through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-52.
2-1 1
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
This is a personalization feature that programs your
door locks to automatically lock or unlock your vehicle.
This feature allows you to program the vehicle to
lock all doors when shifting out of PARK (P). Or, you
can program the door locks to do one of the following:
You can also program this feature to be turned off.
Then you will not have automatic door lock or unlock.
This feature will function when you close the doors and
turn on the ignition. If someone needs to get out
while you’re not in PARK (P), have that person use the
manual or power door lock. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual or
power lock to lock the door again.
Unlock only the driver’s door when shifting back
into PARK (P),
You must program this feature through the DIC. See
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52.
unlock all doors when shifting back into PARK (P),
Overriding Lock Delay
unlock only the driver’s door when turning the
ignition to OFF,
unlock all doors when turning the ignition to OFF, or
no automatic door unlock when shifting into
PARK (P) or turning the ignition to OFF.
2-12
If you need to lock your doors before shifting out of
PARK (P), use the manual or power door lock switchto
lock the doors.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks that prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors of your
vehicle from the inside.
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear seat won’t be able to
open the rear door from the inside. You should let
adults and older children know how these security locks
work, and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door lock, do the following:
To use one of these locks, do the following:
1. Open the rear door you want to lock.
2. Move the lever located on the inside door edge, all
the way up to the lock symbol.
1. Unlock and open the door from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down to the unlock
symbol.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
3. Close the door.
4. Uo tne same tning to ine oiner rear door iock.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-13
Lockout Protection
The power door locks will not work if the key is in the
ignition and any door is open. You can override this
feature by holding the driver’s power door lock switch
for more than three seconds.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out
and close the door. Or, press the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter after shutting the
doors.
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system, see
Universal Theft-Deterrent on page 2- 19.
Trunk
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the trunk lid open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through theseal
between the body and the trunk lid:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle.See “Climate Controls”
in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all theway.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-14
Trunk Release Lockout
Trunk Lock Release
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the master
key and turn it.
Remote Trunk Release
Press the trunk release
button located on the
lower portion of the driver’s
door to release the trunk
lid. The trunk release
lockout switch must be
OFF for this button to work.
The system also works with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The trunk will unlock when the trunk symbol
is pressed ?V!-!i!e the \.ehIC!E? Is I!? PP.!?K (P) 13r
NEUTRAL (N) and the trunk release lockout switch is
in OFF.
The trunk release lockout
switch in the glove box
allows you to secure items
in the trunk, and disable
the fuel door release
and the [email protected]
Transmitter.
Move the trunk release lockout switch to ON, lock the
glove box and take the master key and remote keyless
entry transmitter with you. Now the remote trunk
release button will not open the trunk, the fuel door
release button will not open the fuel door and the
HomeLink Transmitter will not operate.
2-15
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: The emergency trunk release handle is not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk lid or
as an anchor point when securing items in the trunk.
Improper use of the emergency trunk release
handle could damage it.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located near the trunk latch. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle up
to open the trunk from the inside.
2-16
Windows
1
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-17
Power Windows
To stop the window while it is lowering in the express
mode, press the switch again, then release. To raise the
window, hold the switch forward.
Window Lock Out
Press the LOCK button on the driver’s door armrest to
disable all passenger window controls. When the
passenger’s windows are disabled, the driver’s window
switches will still be operable. You can also use the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to lock out only the rear
window controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-45.
Press the LOCK button again to allow passengers to
use their window controls.
Sun Visors
Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of
the windows while the ignition is on or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. In addition, each
passenger’s door armrest has a separate window switch.
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side, while the auxiliary visor remains
to block glare from the front.
Express-Down Window
To extend the visor at the sides, pull out the extension.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s windows have
an express-down feature. When a window switch is
pressed all the way rearward and then released,
the window will lower completely. The window can be
opened in smaller amounts by pressing the switch
rearward slightly, to the first stop.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
2-18
When you open the cover to the driver’s or passenger’s
side visor vanity mirror, the lamps will come on.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. To activate it do the following:
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has anumber of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
remote keyless entry system. The SECURITY light
should come on and stay on.
Universal Theft-Deterrent
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The security system is not
armed until the SECURITY light is off. If the
SECURITY light stays on or flashes when the
ignition is turned on, there is a problem with the
system and the vehicle should be serviced.
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system. With
this system, if your ignition is off, the SECURITY
light will flash as you open the door.
If the SECURITY light comes on for one minute and
then shuts off while the ignition is on, the security
system has detected a problem. See your dealer for
service.
I
I
I
United States
I
I
Canada
If a door or the trunk is opened without the key or
remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off.
Your vehicle’s lamps will flash and the horn will
sound for 30 seconds. then will go off to save battew
power.
2-19
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or manual door lock.
It only activates if you use the power door lock switch or
remote keyless entry transmitter. You should also
remember that you can start your vehicle with the
correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. This
also shuts off the alarm.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, lock the door either using a key or the
manual door lock switch.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry system. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
if you set off the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key.
You can also turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The
alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
2-20
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the driver’s
window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the car, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s lamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. SeeFuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-92.
If the alarm does not sound, or the vehicle’s lamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
[email protected]
Your [email protected] system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
I
I^^
uac
LI 1 1 3
cyutpl
I IGI 11.
[email protected] Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
[email protected] Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the [email protected]
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
[email protected] is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This means you don’t have to do anything different to
arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert
or remove the key from the ignition.
When the [email protected] system senses that someone
is Ilsin9 the wronrJ key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
2-21
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key
may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
[email protected] to have a new key made.
It is possible for the [email protected] decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for learning additional keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service [email protected] to
have new keys made. To program additional keys you
will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2 repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Then
continue with Step 3.
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has [email protected] stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see
your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY telltale light will turn off once the
key has been programmed. It may not be apparent
that the SECURITY light went on due to how
quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your [email protected] system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
[email protected] system at this time.
If you lose or damage a [email protected] key, see your
dealer to have a new key made.
2-22
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the
ignition switch, you can
turn the switch to four
different positions.
Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
e
Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or
slow - for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t
make full-throttle starts.
e
Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles
(322km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
e
Don’t tnw a trailer during break-in. See “Tawing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
Notice: If your key seems stuck inOFF and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Ifit is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
iooi io furce ii cuuid Gi-e“-k tiie key UI tijZ. iyr,itior,
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
OFF: This is the only position in which you can remove
the key. This position locks your ignition and transaxle.
It’s a thzft-de:e;;ent
feature.
2-23
ACC (Accessory): This position lets you use your
electrical accessories such as power windows, power
sunroof (option), radio and the windshield wipers.
ON: This is the position the switch returns to after you
start your engine and release the switch. This is the
position for normal driving. Even when the engine is not
running, you can use ON to operate your electrical
accessories and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
START: This position starts your engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON for normal driving.
Key Reminder Warning
If you leave your key in the OFF ignition position, you
will hear a warning chime when you open the
driver’s door.
Always leave your key in OFF. If you leave it in any
other position, you will drain the battery power.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
After you turn the ignition off and remove the key, you
will still have power to accessories such as the
power windows, audio steering wheel controls, clock,
sunroof (option), accessory power outlet and the
radio for up to 10 minutes. The instrument panel cluster
lights will stay on for a few seconds, then go out.
Once you open a door, the power will shut off.
2-24
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15
seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key in
START for about 10 seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or six
seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the engine.
After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Nofice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with yourdealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather,
0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four
hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
&D\!P 32°F (““c),
of the con!ant heater is not
required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, above the
headlamp assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
I
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock.Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-voltAC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
I
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
2-25
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
There are several different
positions for your shift
lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-26
__
js dangerous to get 01
of your veh
f the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is
running unless youhave to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, alwaysset your
parking brake and move the shiftlever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in ON.
Shifting into a Glgde gear while yo^ engllie is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly.You
could lose control andhit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drivegear while your engine
is racing.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow.
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-32.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’t
covered by your warranty.
(a):
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
This position is for
normal driving. if you need more power for passing, and
you’re:
Going less than approximately 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
0
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
2-27
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
Here are
some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@ ):
(a).
When driving on hilly, winding roads,
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears, or
when going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE
or THIRD (3). YOU can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
(0
2-28
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (I), the transaxle won’t shift
into FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try
to drive. This might happen if youwere stuck in very
deep sand or mud orwere up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if
you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle
there with only the acceleratorpedal. This could
overheat and damage the transaxle.
Use your brakes
to hold your vehiclein position on a hill.
Parking Brake
Your vehicle has a PUSH
TO RELEASE parking
brake. To set the parking
brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down
with your right foot. Push
down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on while the parking brake is set and a single
chime will be heard.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your
left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the
release position.
if you try to drive approximately 20 feet (6.1 m>with the
parking brake on, the brake light stays on and a
chime sounds until you release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-36. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-29
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
PARK (P)with
if the shift lever is not fully in
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly.You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake by pushing down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever all the way forward.
2-30
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” previously in this section.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever‘out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
)’3L!’\!P
mc?‘erl fhP shift !eve!- intc P.A.!?K (P), hn!d
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P).
If you can, it means the shift lever wasn’t fully locked
into PARK (P).
2-31
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation
on page 2-26.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold
the brake pedal down but still can't shift out of PARK (P),
try the following:
1. Turn the key to the OFF ignition position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you
want.
5. Take your vehicle to an authorized service center
as soon as you can.
2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
T..,,Igs that can burn couldL d c h hot exh,st
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
Engine exhaust car. --jll. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-33
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.’’
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif
the fan is at the highest setting.One place this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the enginerunning.
I
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See
“Winter Driving” in the Index.
2-34
It can be dangerousto get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you haveto. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shiftlever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer,
also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-36.
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass. Your vehicle’s mirror may
also contain [email protected] See OnStaP System on
page 2-39 for more information.
The mirror also includes an eight-point compass display
in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Mirror Operation
MIRROR: Press this button to turn on the automatic
dimming feature. Press it again to turn off the automatic
dimming feature.
6
(On/Off): For mirrors equipped with OnStara
controls, press and hold this button for several seconds
to turn on the automatic dimming feature. Press and
hold it again to turn the automatic dimming feature off.
The green indicator light will come on when this
feature is active. The automatic dimming feature will be
active each time the vehicle is started.
Compass Operation
COMPASS: Press this button once to turn the compass
on or off.
6 (On/Off):
For mirrors equipped with [email protected]
controls, press this button once to turn the compass on
or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. If the
letter C shmrld ever anpear in the compass window. the
compass may need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Mirrors equipped with [email protected] can be placed
in calibration mode by pressing and holding the
on/off button until a C is shown in the compass display.
2-35
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold COMPASS (or the on/off button for
mirrors equipped with [email protected]) until a
zone number appears in the display.
2-36
3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press
the COMPASS button (or the on/off button for
mirrors equipped with [email protected]) quickly until
the correct zone number appears in the display.
Stop pressing the button and the mirror will return to
normal operation. If C appears in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration. See
“Compass Calibration” explained previously.
Outside Power Mirrors
control pad is accidentally bumped while driving. Adjust
each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the memory function,
the mirrors and driver’s seat position can be stored into
memory. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 2-48.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
The controls for the outside power mirrors are located
on the driver’s door armrest.
Press the left or right side of the UR selector switch
----
L
r L rL.,
---+,--I
--A
+c.
l u ~ a t e u
U G I I G ~ L I IL I I G ~ W I I I I W I pau LU
I---L-^~
nh,,mn
+ h n I-$+
W I U U ~ GL I I G
I’CIIL
or right mirror.
If you have the memory seat and mirrors feature, the
passenger’s outside power mirror also includes a
tilt-down feature that operates when the shift lever is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), the passenger’s mirror will return to its
original position after a five-second delay. This delay
prevents movement of the mirror if multiple gear
transitions (REVERSE (R) to DRIVE (D) to
REVERSE (R)) occur during a parallel parking
maneuver. This feature can be programmed on or off
through the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-45 or DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52
fer p r q r s . ~ ? m i instrwtinns
n~
\/phi&x are rieIi\/ered
with this feature off.
To adjust the mirror, use one of the four arrows located
on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction
you want it to go. When finished adjusting the mirrors,
I--*.-
+h- I I D A A I ~ ~ + n- nW
a,i+nh
~ e d v e11 IG u n ~ G I G L L U I~ V V I L L I
thn
rrnntnr nncitinn
CILGI
I
~UJILIUI
I,
I 1 1 I LI IC ~
to prevent unwanted mirror movementin case the
2-37
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
When you operate the rear window defogger, the
heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview mirrors
also warm up to help clear them of ice and snow. See
“Rear Window Defogger” under Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-23.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
I
2-38
[email protected]’System
[email protected]
OnStap provides a number of service plans to closely
meet your needs. Some of the services currently
provided by [email protected]:
e
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking
AccidentAssist
[email protected] global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state of
the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information and convenience services.
An [email protected] plan is included in the price
of your vehicle. You can easily upgrade or extend your
[email protected] to meet your personal needs.
A complete [email protected]’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the [email protected] Service
.!
Ayreerrlerli are ir1C;iudeLi ill yuur U I I ~ L-eyu~ppeu
~
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact [email protected] 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(I-888-466-7827), or press the blue [email protected]
to speak to an [email protected] 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
n
~
C\L_
..R
_I
Remote Door Unlock
Remote Diagnostics
[email protected] (Requires separate activation
and annual fee on some plans)
Online and Personal Concierge Services
Route Support
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
2-39
[email protected] Calling
[email protected] Advisor
With [email protected] Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts, no roaming charges and no access fees. To
find out more about [email protected] Calling, refer
to the [email protected]’s guide in your vehicle’s glove
box, or call [email protected] 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
With [email protected] Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotes
and sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through
your vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
2-40
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of [email protected] and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for [email protected]
Calling and [email protected] Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
[email protected] Transmitter
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
[email protected], a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
yaie upei-L
-.-..--.dlUl5, ydl dye: UUUl
J-,,
----I”^
--+.-.,
UpCl IC13, G I 1 1 1 y
A,,,
UUUl
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
[email protected] can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the [email protected]
Transmitter, It comp!ies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2-41
Programming the [email protected]
Transmitter
Do not use the [email protected] with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse’’
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future [email protected] programming.It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed [email protected] should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing [email protected]
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact [email protected] the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
2-42
2.
3.
4.
5.
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/orthird
transmitter to the remaining two [email protected] buttons.
Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the [email protected]
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on [email protected] andthe hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after [email protected] successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
Press and hold the newly-trained [email protected] button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the [email protected] is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two [email protected] buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming [email protected]”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head
unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed [email protected] for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
io compieie ine proyrarrllllirly.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLinkO to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming [email protected]’ procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLinkm’ with the following:
Continue to press and hold the [email protected] while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by [email protected] The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming [email protected]”
to complete.
[email protected] should nowactivate your rolling code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two [email protected],
begin with Step 2 of “Programming [email protected]”Do not
repeat Step 1.
2-43
Using [email protected]
Press and hold the appropriate [email protected] for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing [email protected]
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
[email protected] now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming [email protected]”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
[email protected]” next.
Reprogramming a Single [email protected]
Button
To program a device to [email protected] usinga [email protected]
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired [email protected] button.Do
not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the [email protected]
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
[email protected]”
Resetting Defaults
To reset [email protected] to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the [email protected]
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact [email protected] at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-44
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box.
To open ii, lift the latch release on the left side of
the glove box door.
The VALET key will not work in the glove box door lock.
In front of the storage area is a cupholder. Press and
release the cupholder cover to open. Do not try to pull it
out. Press the cupholder back to its recessed position
when not in use.
Assist Handles
A handle above each rear door and the front
passenger’s door can be used to help you get in or out
of your vehicle.
Front Storage Area
The front armrest opens into a storage area. To open it,
push the latch at the front center of the armrest.
When the latch disengages, pull up on the armrest to
open it. Inside you will find storage for cassettes,
compact discs and coins.
2-45
Floor Mats
Convenience Net
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mats. The driver’s
side floor mat is held in place by a locator hook.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it
just inside the back wall of the trunk.
To remove the driver’s side floor mat, slide the floor mat
towards the driver’s seat to unhook it. Then pick up
the floor mat to remove it.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
To reinstall the floor mat, line up the opening in the floor
mat over the locator hook and push it down into
place.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a rear storage armrest with
cupholders and a pass-through feature.
Lift the front of the cover on the armrest to reveal the
storage space.
Pull down the interior door to access the trunk.
2-46
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has this
option, the switches are
located on the headliner
between the sun visors.
There are two switches that operate the sunroof. The
switches will only work when the ignition is on or when
RAP is active. See “Retained Accessory Power
(RAP)” under lgnition Positions on page 2-23.
The OPENKLOSE switch has positions for open or
close and express open. The TILTKLOSE switch has
pnsitinns fnr tilt or close.
Comfort Stop: Press and release the OPEN/CLOSE
switch rearward to the second position to express open
the glass panel to the comfort stop position. The
comfort stop position is designed to help reduce noise
and make the passengers more comfortable.
Express Open: The glass panel may be fully opened
by pressing the OPEN/CLOSE switch rearward
again. When the glass panel is express opening,
pressing either switch in any direction will stop it. If you
press and hold the OPENKLOSE switch in the
express open position for more than one and a half
seconds, the express open operation will be overridden
and the sunroof will operate manually.
Tilt: To tilt open the glass panel, press and hold the
TILTKLOSE switch. The sunshade must be opened
by hand.
Close: To close the glass panel, press and hold the
OPENKLOSE or TILTKLOSE switch in the close
position. As the glass panel reaches the closed position,
it will open slightly towards the tilt position and then
drup ciowr I iu ii le
puSiiiui-1 pro~ibez b & i ~ ;SZS!.
Open: Press and hold the OPEN/CLOSE switch to the
first position to open the glass panel and sunshade.
The sunshade can also be opened by hand.
2-47
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat and Mirrors
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the driver’s door
panel, and are used to
program and recall
memory settings for the
driver’s seating, outside
mirror positions and
climate controls. See
Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-23
for more information.
To save your seat and mirror positions into memory,
use the following procedure:
1. First identify the DRIVER # on the Driver information
Center (DIC) by pressing the MEMORY
button (1 or 2) or by pressing the button with the
unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See Driver Information Center (DE) on
page 3-45.
2-48
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and lumbar position to a
safe and comfortable driving position. Adjust both
outside mirrors to suit you. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 2-37.
3. Press and hold the MEMORY button (1 or 2)
corresponding with your DRIVER # displayed on the
DIC for longer than three seconds. You will hear
two beeps confirming that the seat and mirror
positions have been entered into memory.
To set the seat and mirror positions for a second driver,
follow the previous steps, but start by pressing the
button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter that
displays the other DRIVER # on the DIC. Be sure to use
the MEMORY button (1 or 2) which corresponds to
the DRIVER # identified by the second transmitter.
To recall your memory positions, your vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Push and release the MEMORY
button (1 or 2) corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat and mirrors will move to the position
previously stored for the identified driver. You will
hear one beep.
To recall the exit position, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Push and release the EXIT button and the
seat will move to the exit position previously stored
for the currently identified driver. You will hear one beep.
If an exit position has not been stored for the current
identified driver, the seat will move all the way back.
To store the exit position for an easy exit, use the
following procedure:
To stop recall movement of the seat at any time, press
the driver’s power seat control located on the outboard
side of the front seat.
1. First identify the DRIVER # by pressing the
MEMORY button (1 or 2) or by pressing the button
with the unlock symbol on the transmitter.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the EXIT button for longer than
three seconds. You will hear two beeps confirming
that the seat exit position has been entered into
memory.
Mirrors and lumbar positions will not be stored or
recalled for the exit position.
If you would like your stored driving or exit position to
be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the
transmitter, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-52.
To set the exit position for a second driver, follow the
previous steps, but start by pressing the button with the
unlock symbol on the transmitter that displays the
other DRIVER # on the DIC. Be sure to use the
MtMUHY button (1 or 2 j wnicn corresponds io the
DRIVER # identified by the other transmitter.
2-49
A
2-50
NOTES
3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview .............................. -3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................ 3-4
Other Warning Devices ................................... 3-5
Horn .............................................................
3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................
3-5
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3-6
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3-14
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3-17
Accessory Power Outlets ............................... 3-21
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................ 3-22
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.23
Automatic Climate Control System .................. 3-23
Outlet Adjustment ......................................... 3-27
Steering Wheel Climate Controls ..................... 3-28
Climate Controls Personalization ..................... 3.29
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-30
Instrument Panel Cluster ............................... -3-31
Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3-32
-I acnorneier
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3.37
Traction Control System Active Light ...............3.38
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3.38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3.39
Oil Pressure Light ......................................... 3.42
Cruise Control Light ...................................... 3.43
Fuel Gage ...................................................
3.44
Driver Information Center (DIC) ....................... 3.45
DIC Warnings and Messages ......................... 3.50
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................ 3.52
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3.59
Setting the Time ........................................... 3.59
Radio with Cassette and CD .......................... 3.60
Navigation/Radio System ............................... 3.69
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ........................... 3-70
Personal Choice Radio Controls ...................... 3.73
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3.73
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ....................... 3.74
I...I-.-L--A... n,.-J:, n-, --+in'u
2 7 A
V I luel a w l lull ty I laulu I IGL, G ~ L I U I I ......................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-74
Care of Your CDs ......................................... 3-75
Care of Your CD Player ................................ 3-76
Diversity Antenna System .............................. 3.76
Chime Level Adjustment ............................... -3-76
.-..
................................................. n n o
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3-33
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-34
Battery Warning Light .................................... 3.35
Brake System Warning Light .......................... 3.35
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-36
I
1 T
3- 1
The main components of your instrument panel are the
following:
A.Air Outlet
B. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
C. Steering Wheel Controls for Climate Control System
D. Steering Wheel Controls for Audio System
E. Windshield Wiperwasher Control
F. Driver information Center (DIC)
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Button
H. Climate Control System
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Knob
J. Trip Odometer Buttons
K. HoodRelease
L. Parking Brake
M. Cruise Control Lever
N. ignition Switch
0. Audio System
P. Accessory Power Outlet
Q. Glove Box (Trunk Release Lockout Switch inside)
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher button is located in the
center of the instrument panel.
Your hazard flashers work no matter what position your
key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. To turn off the flashers, press
the button again.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
worn
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever
toward you. Then move the
wheel to a comfortable
position and release
the lever to lock the wheel
in piace.
Press the center area of the steering wheel to sound
the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
3-5
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal either a turn or a lane change.
I
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn andLane-Change Signals
HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger
Flash-To-Pass
For information on exterior lamps, see “Exterior Lamps”
later in this section.
3-6
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash very fast, a bulb may be burned out and
other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident.
If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn,
check the fuse (see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-92 ) and check for burned-out bulbs.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 0.8 miles
(1.3 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal and the DIC will display the TURN SIGNAL ON?
reminder message. To turn off the chime and
message, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
To turn off the DIC message while the turn signal is
still active, press any buttonon the DIC. See Driver
information Center (DE) on page 3-45 for more
information.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high, push
the lever away from you until you hear a click. Then
release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
If the fog lamps are on when you turn on the high-beam
headlamps, the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps
will turn back on when you turn off the high-beam
headlamps.
3-7
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on
as long as you hold the lever there. Release the
lever to turn them off.
If your headlamps are on, and on high beam, your
headlamps will switch to low beam when the lever is
released. To get back to high beam, push the lever away
from you.
The lever on the right side of your steering column
operates your windshield wipers.
If your windshield wipers are on for more than six
seconds while you are driving, the low-beam headlamps,
instrument panel cluster backlighting and the taillamps
will turn on. For more information see “Wiper-Activated
Headlamps” under Exterior Lamps on page 3-14.
3-8
For a single wiping cycle, move the lever down to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then release it. The
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles,
hold the lever on MIST longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, move the lever up to
the LO position. For high-speed wiping, move the lever
up further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the lever
to OFF.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wiper cycles. Move the lever up to the first
detent, INT (Intermittent). Turn the band labeled
INT ADJ (Intermittent Adjustment) down toward the
shorter lines for fewer wiper passes per minute. As you
turn the band toward the longer lines, the wiper
cycles per minute will increase.
RainsenseTMII Wipers
The moisture sensor is mounted on the interior side of
the windshield below the rearview mirror and is used
to automatically operate the windshield wipers.
This system operates by monitoring the amount of
moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes occur as
needed to clear the windshield depending on the driving
conditions and sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow,
fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will
occur more frequently. The system will operate in the
delay, low speed and high speed modes. If the system is
left on for long periods of time, occasional wipes may
occur without any moisture on the windshield. This
is normal and indicates that the RainsenseTM system is
activated.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
\yindrihield, ~ ~ r ~ f ~ !lcgspn
Il;/
9~ t h l ~ ~
them.
!
!f \J/ -n-l’l r hl=dnc
do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-59.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker wi!! stop them unti! the mntnr con!s. C!ear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
The RainsenseTM system is activated by moving the
wiper lever up to the INT position and turning the
INT ADJ band to one of the five sensitivity levels within
the delay area. The bottom INT ADJ position is the
lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows more
rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes.
You can increase the sensitivity of the system and the
frequency of wipes by turning the INT ADJ band
away from you to the higher sensitivity levels. The top
position is the highest sensitivity setting, level five.
A single wipe will occur each time you turn the INT ADJ
band to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the
sensitivity level has been increased.
Notice: The wipers must be turned off when going
through a car wash to avoid damage.
The MIST and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the RainsenseTM function. The
system can be overridden at any time by manually
changing the wiper control to LO or HI speed.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the
rainsensor. Doing this could cause the rainsensor
to malfunction.
3-10
Windshield Washer
The lever on the right side of your steering column also
controls your windshield washer. To spray washer
fluid on the windshield, push the button on the end of
the lever. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
washer cvcles, push and hold the button.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Ice build up can block washer nozzles. Remove ice for
proper operation.
If the fluid level in the windshield washer bottle is low,
the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on
the DIC. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This is helpful on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
---dl---
...Lam1
~ I G G U I G
VVIIGGI
~ ~
,
,
:
,
,
:
,
---I
,
~ J I I I I I I I I Y ,a11uY W U
I--..
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you’re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
--..I-I
I.WUIU
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
3-1 1
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting the cruise control at a desired speed and then
applying the brake will end the cruise control function.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can briefly push the cruise control lever up to RES-ACC
(Resume-Accelerate)to reset. This returns you to
the desired preset speed.
Remember, if you hold the lever up at RES-ACC, the
vehicle will accelerate until you release the lever
or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the lever at RES-ACC.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
1. Push the cruise control switch, located on the right
side of the steering column at the end of the lever,
in to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push the lever down to SET-CST (Coast) and
release it. The CRUISE light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-1 2
There are three ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to go to a higher speed.
Push the lever down, then release the lever and
the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher
speed.
Move the cruise lever up to RES-ACC. Hold it there
until you reach a desired speed and then release
the lever.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the lever up to RES-ACC briefly and then
release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1-6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by pushing the lever down
to SET-CST.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
@
Push the lever down until you reach a desired lower
speed then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the lever
down briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control Without Erasing the
Set Speed
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
*
@
Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
pull the cruise lever towards you to cancel cruise.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
To resume the set speed see “Resuming a Set Speed”
earlier in this section.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Exterior Lamps
(Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
{OO:
The lever on the left side
of the steering column
operates the exterior
lamps.
SidemarkerLamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
z o (Headlamps): Turning the switch to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
-:g-: Turn the outside part of the lever with this symbol
on it, to operate the lamps. The exterior lamp switch
has three positions.
OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off all
lamps and lights, except the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
3-14
AUTO (Automatic Headlamps): Turning the exterior
lamps control to AUTO will turn the headlamps, taillamps
and parking lamps on and off, while the ignition is on,
by sensing how dark it is outside. See “Automatic
Headlamp System” later in this section for more
information.
Wiper-Activated Headlamps
This feature turns on the low-beam headl,amps,
instrument panel cluster backlighting and taillamps after
the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately six seconds. To operate, the exterior
lamps control must be in AUTO and it must be
dark enough outside.
When the exterior lamps control is in OFF or the
parking lamp position and the windshield wiper control
is on (LO, HI or INT), the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message will appear on the DIC.
When you turn the key to OFF, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. The wiper-activated
headlamps will also turn off if you turn the exterior
lamps control to OFF orturn off the windshield wipers.
Headlamps on Reminder
If the exterior lamps control is left on, you’ll hear a
warning chime when you turn the ignition off, remove
the key from the ignition and open the driver’s door.
I n--IcI
bllmm:mre*
nrr..+;mrr
u a y r l l I I G I I U I I I I I I I ~Lalllpa
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before s~Jnset.
FL!!!~
f~jnctiona!
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is off, and
e
the transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps
will be on. The parking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps won’t be on.
With your headlamp control in AUTO when it is dark
enough outside, your low-beam headlamps will
automatically come on. The other lamps that turn on
with your headlamps will also turn on. When it is bright
enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and
your high-beam headlamps change to the reduced
brightness of DRL.
To turn off all exterior lighting at night when you are
parked, turn the exterior lamps control all the way toward
OFF. The DRL will turn on automatically and the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will be displayed
on the DIC when you move the transaxle out of
PARK (P).
3-15
If the exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
position at night, only the parking lamps will be on. If the
transaxle is out of PARK (P), only the parking lamps
will be active and the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message will be displayed on the DIC.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Automatic Headlamp System
Fog Lamps
To turn on only the front
fog lamps, turn the fog
lamp band to the single fog
lamp symbol. To turn on
both the front and rear fog
lamps, turn the fog
lamp band to the double
fog lamp symbol.
The automatic headlamp system will keep your
headlamps on when it is dark outside and the ignition is
in ON.
It’s possible that your headlamps may go out if you
drive from a dark area into a bright area like a lighted
parking lot. If this happens, turn on your headlamps with
the exterior lamps control.
Turning on the front fog lamps only will automatically
activate the parking lamps. Turning on the front and rear
fog lamps will automatically activate the parking lamps
and headlamps.
Light Sensor
To turn off the fog lamps, turn the band to OFF. The
front fog lamps will also turn off when you turn on your
high-beam headlamps, but will turn on again when
you switch to low beams.
Your automatic headlamps and DRL work with the light
sensor on top of the instrument panel. Don’t cover it
up. If you do it will read “dark” and the automatic
headlamp lighting will turn on.
3-16
Continuous use of the fog lamps will shorten bulb life
Limit use as necessary.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Interior Lamps
If the exterior lamps control has been left on, the
exterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned to OFF and any door
has been opened. This protects against draining the
battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps
or parking lamps on. If you need to leave the lamps
on for more than 10 minutes, use the exterior lamps
control to turn the lamps back on after the ignition has
been turned to OFF and any door has been opened.
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
.
.
..
. ...
I
.
.'
The knob for this feature is
located on the driver's side
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the instrument
panel cluster lights and displays. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel cluster
iignts and dispiays.
If it is day and your parking lamps are on, the instrument
panel cluster lights and displays will come on at full
intensity and will not be adjustable. If it is dark enough
outside and your parking lamps are on, the instrument
pane! cluster lights and displays a.nd the backlighting for
the door switches will come on, and can also be
adjusted.
3-17
Courtesy Lamps
Entry Lighting
If it is dark enough outside and the front reading lamp
slider lever, located on the overhead console, is in
the DOOR position, when any door is opened all of the
vehicles courtesy lamps will come on. See “Front
Reading Lamps” and “Rear Reading Lamps” later in this
section for more information. They make it easier for
you to enter and leave the vehicle. The courtesy lamps
will remain on for about 25 seconds after all doors
have been closed. They will then theater dim to off.
If it is dark enough outside and you press the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter while all
doors are closed, the interior courtesy lamps will
come on and stay on for approximately 40 seconds.
When the 40 seconds are up, the lights will automatically
fade until they turn off. The lamps will turn off
immediately by pressing the lock symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, by turning the ignition key
to ON or by activating the power door locks.
Move the front reading lamp slider lever to ON to turn
on the interior courtesy lamps. When the control is
moved back to either OFF or DOOR, the courtesy lamps
will immediately turn off.
Delayed Entry Lighting
If the control is OFF when the doors are opened, only
the lower instrument panel courtesy lamps will come on.
Also, if the control is OFF when illuminated entry or
delayed exit lighting are active, only the lower instrument
panel courtesy lamps will be on.
If a door is left ajar, your interior lamps will turn off after
10 minutes to save your battery.
3-18
When you open the door to enter your vehicle, the
interior lamps will come on if it is dark enough outside.
When you close the door with the ignition off, the
interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds. When the
25 seconds are up the lights will automatically fade until
they turn off. Locking the doors with the power door
lock switch or with the lock symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, will override the delayed entry
lighting and the lamps will turn off immediately.
Theater Dimming
Parade Dimming
This feature allows for a three to five-second fade out of
the overhead courtesy lamps instead of immediate
turn off after you remove the key from the ignition. They
will not fade if the interior lamps are manually turned
on. The lower instrument panel courtesy lamps will not
fade out.
To activate the instrument panel backlighting during the
day, turn the exterior lamps control to the parking
lamp position. Dimming of the instrument panel display
is not possible during daylight hours. The instrument
panel display can only be adjusted when the parking
lamps are on and it is dark outside.
Delayed Exit Lighting
Perimeter Lighting
This feature willturn on the interior lamps for 25 seconds
after you remove the key from the ignition while the
doors are closed and it is night. This will give you time
to find the door handle or lock switches as you exit
the vehicle. When the 25 seconds are up, or if the key
is reinserted into the ignition, the lights will be turned
off by the theater dimming system. The lamps will turn
off immediately by pressing the lock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, by turning the ignition
key to ON or by activating the power door locks.
When the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, the DRL headlamps, parking
lamps and back-up lamps will turn on for approximately
25 seconds if it is dark enough outside.
This feature can be programmed to be on or off for
each transmitter. You can also program how long the
exterior lamps will stay on after unlocking the vehicle.
You must program this feature through the DIC. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52.
3-19
Front Reading Lamps
tear Reading Lamps
These lamps will come on when you open the doors.
You can also turn them on by pressing the button on the
side of the lamp. Press it again to turn them off.
These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps will come
on when you open a door. They will turn off when
you turn on the ignition. If a door is left open, they will
turn off after about 10 minutes.
To turn on the reading lamps when the doors are
closed, press the button under the lamp you want on.
Press it again to turn the lamp off.
These lamps work even when the ignition is off. To
avoid draining your vehicle’s battery, be sure to turn off
all front and rear reading lamps when leaving your
vehicle.
3-20
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp or cigarette lighters. When the ignition is
turned off, the power to these features will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes. Power will be restored for
an additional 10 minutes if any door is opened, the trunk
is opened or the courtesy lamp control is turned on.
To restore power to the cigarette lighters, the ignition
must be turned back to ON.
Battery Load Management
Accessory Power Outlets
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at a
higher rpm setting than normal to make sure the
battery charges. High electrical loads may occur when
several of the following are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, blower fan, heated
seats and engine cooling fans.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
If your vehicle’s battery remains in a heavy discharge
condition for a long period of time, the fan, rear
defogger, heated seats and heated mirrors will be
disabled and the DIC will display BATTERY SAVER
ACTIVE. This can happen either under long periods of
idling or low speed driving with high electrical loading,
or in the event of a charging system fault.
The accessory power outlet (12-volt) is located on the
front passenger’s side of the vehicle, near the floor
on the console.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be pulled
down to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet will only operate when the
ignition is in ON and for 10 minutes after turning the
ignition off. If you would like the accessory power outlet
to operate regardless of ignition position, and for
extended periods of time, see “Engine Compartment
Fuse Block under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-92 or contact your dealer.
Noficer When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum eieciricai ioaa rnusi noi exceeci i 5 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your battery.
3-2 1
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper useof
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Push and release the cover to reveal the front ashtray
and cigarette lighter.
Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.
3-22
To clean an ashtray, make sure the cover is open fully,
then lift out the ashtray by pulling on the snuffer.
To use a lighter, push the center all the way in and let it
go. When it’s ready, the center will pop back out by
itself. Pull out the entire unit to use it.
Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating elementwhen it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heatingelement.
The cigarette lighter will only operate when the ignition
is in ON and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition
off. If you would like the lighter to operate regardless of
the ignition position, and for extended periods of
time, see “Engine Compartment Fuse Block” under
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92 or see your
dealer.
Leaving an accessory on for a long period of time can
drain the vehicle’s battery.
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When both the mode knob and the
fan knob are in the AUTO mode and the temperature
is set, the system will automatically control the
inside temperature, the air delivery mode and the fan
speed.
1. Press both the mode and the fan knobs to place
the system in AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature to 75" F (24" C) on the
display.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will remain in
manual mode at that temperature and it will not go
into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature. if
necessary.
3-23
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
To change the automatic climate control display from an
English display to a metric display, push the OFF
button located in the Driver Information Center (DIC) for
several seconds. The display in the DIC will also
change from an English to a metric display. To return to
an English display, repeat the procedure.
Manual Operation
FAN: Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turning this
knob cancels automatic operation and places the system
in manual mode. Press the knob to return to automatic
operation.
Temperature Control: Maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle using the red and blue arrows located
below the digital display. Push the red arrow for a
warmer temperature level and the blue arrow for
a cooler temperature level. Your selected temperature
setting will be shown on the digital display for five
seconds, and then the outside temperature will be
displayed.
3-24
To change the current mode, use the left knob to select
one of the following:
OFF: Turning the left knob to OFF will cause the fan to
turn off and the airflow to be directed through the
floor outlets. The display will show the outside
temperature when the system is set to OFF.
/I‘ (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
#
panel outlets.
(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
I# (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
The left knob can also be used to select the defog or
defrost mode. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
(Recirculation): Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air coming into the vehicle. It can be
used to prevent outside air and odors from entering
your vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your
vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode onor off. When the button is pressed,
an indicator light will come on. The recirculation mode
cannot be used with the defrost mode.
a AK (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to
override the automatic system and turn the air
conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed, an
indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that air conditioning is activated. When in AUTO
the air conditioning compressor will come on
automatically, as necessary.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time it
takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select N C .
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Sensors
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation and the air inside of your vehicle, then uses the
information to maintain the selected temperature by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary no not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.
3-25
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of
fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly.
+>
(Defog): This mode directs the air equally between
the windshield and the floor outlets. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing.
9 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets (for the side
windows), with some air directed to the floor outlets. In
this mode, the system will automatically run the air
conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature
is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
: Press this button to turn the rear window defogger
on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the
rear window as possible.
3-26
At speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), the defogger will
operate continuously until you press the REAR
button again. After 10 minutes of driving below 30 mph
(48 km/h), the defogger will turn off automatically. If
you need additional warming time, push the button
again. The system will then operate for five minutes
before going off by itself.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defogger
button is pressed.
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you
do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a
decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Passenger Temperature Control
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver and the
front-seat passenger can select separate temperature
settings. This feature allows the passenger to select
a temperature that is 8" F (4" C) warmer or cooler than
the driver's selected temperature.
The knob for this feature is
located on the passenger's
door. Turn the knob
clockwise or
counterclockwise to a
warmer or cooler setting.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the lever located in
the center of each front
outlet to change the
direction of the airflow.
Use the thumbwheel
located below each front
outlet to turn the outlets on
and off.
3-27
Operation Tips
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Steering Wheel Climate Controls
Move the control between the rear outlets up to direct
airflow through the upper outlets. Move the control down
to direct airflow through the floor outlets. Adjust the
direction of the airflow with the levers located in
the center of each rear outlet.
3-28
With this feature some
heating and cooling
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel.
A
$&‘ v
(Fan): Press the up or down arrow on the
fan button to override the automaticfan control and
increase or decrease thefan speed.
A TEMP v (Temperature):
Press either arrow on
the TEMP button once to display your current
temperature setting in the digital display. Press the up
or down arrow again to provide a warmer or cooler
temperature setting.
2. Locate memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door
panel.
3. Press the memory button on the door panel that
corresponds to the number on the back of the
transmitter you are programming, until you hear two
beeps. The beeps confirm that your selection has
been saved and can now be recalled. For more
information on the memory feature, see Memory
Seat and Mkrors on page 2-48.
Climate Controls Personalization
Follow these steps each time you want to change the
stored settings.
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, up to two
drivers are able to store and recall climate control
settings for the temperature, the fan speed and the
direction of the airflow.
To recall the climate control settings last stored on your
transmitter, press the unlock button on your remote
keyless entry transmitter and put the ignition in
ACC (Accessory) or ON. The settings will be recalled.
Memory buttons 1 and 2 are located on the driver’s
door panel and correspond to the numbers 1 or 2 found
on the back of each remote keyless entry transmitter.
To store settings, do the following:
1. Select the desired temperature, fan speed and
airflow mode. If desired, a separate temperature
setting may also be selected for the front seat
passenger. For information on how to do this, see
Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-23.
3-29
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-30
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC) that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your vehicle is equipped with this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that
are explained on the following pages. The instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle
is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to
drive safely and economically.
PO
RO
NO
DO
3 0
2 0
1 0
United States version shown,Canada similar
3-31
Speedometer and Odometer
,
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The speedometer shows a top speed of 140 mph
(220 km/h). This is not intended to be the vehicle’s top
speed.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometers
Your trip odometer tells you how far you have driven
since you last reset it. Your vehicle is equipped with two
trip odometers, A and B. The buttons for this feature
are located to the left of the steering column. The
trip odometer displays are located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster. Press the TRIP A/B button
to change which trip odometer is displayed.
3-32
Press and hold the TRIP RESET button to reset the trip
odometer that is currently being displayed.
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then flash for several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will come
on briefly, but the chime will not sound.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
If your engine speed equals or exceeds the safe limit for
I IAT
n r n ~
I
P
~r h 1 0 n n n n :I I W I ... I ILWUUL ~
~ I 11v I V I ID
u
upcIaLIuI~,L I I C 111caaayc
displayed on the DIC.
-----L;--
LL,
_----I-
Notice: Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded area, or when the
message HOT...REDUCE ENG RPM is displayed.
Engine damage may occur.
3-33
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-47.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
several seconds. Then
the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-34
If the air bag readiness light stays onafter you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly.The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash,or they
could even inflate without a crash.To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,have your
vehicle serviced rightaway if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
On the DIC an AIR BAG PROBLEM message will be
displayed when there is a problem with the air bag
system. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50
for more information.
Battery Warning Light
’
This light will come on
briefly when you start the
vehicle, as a check to
show you it is working;
then it should go out.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
1
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is
on could drain your battery and result in a vehicle that
may stall.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and climate control system.
On the DIC, a CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM message will
be displayed and a warning chime will sound. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page3-50 for more
information.
BRAKE
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If you try to drive off with the parking brake
set, a chime will also come on until you release the
parking brake. If the light stays Gn after yGu: parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a brake
problem.
3-35
A PARK BRAKE SET message will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) while the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is moving. The message
will not come on if the transaxle is in PARK (P).
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when your engine
is started and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays
on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning
light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35 earlier in this
section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-36
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
,
TRAC
OFF
United States
Canada
This warning light should come on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your ariving accordingiy.
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the TC button
located on the center console, the warning light will
come on and stay on. To turn the system back
on, press the button again. The warning light should
go off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-8 for more information.
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
3-37
Traction Control System Active
Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
I
United States
Canada
When your traction control system is limiting wheel spin,
this light will come on. Slippery road conditions may
exist if the traction control system active light comes on,
so adjust your driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the traction
control system stops limiting wheel spin.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the shaded warning zone,
your engine is hot.
To prevent engine overheating, the air conditioning
compressor will turn off automatically, a fast-pulsed
...A/C
chime will sound, and the message ENGINE HOT
OFF will appear in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). As the engine cools down, the air conditioning
compressor will automatically turn back on.
3-38
If the coolant temperature is over 262°F (128"C), the
message HOT...IDLE ENGINE will appear. It means you
should reduce the engine load and speed to prevent
the engine from overheating.
If the coolant temperature is over 268°F (131"C), the
message HOT...STOP ENGINE will appear. It means
that your engine coolant has overheated. You should
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28 for more information.
If your coolant level is low, the message LOW ENGINE
COOLANT will appear on the Driver Information
Center. Check your coolant level as soon as possible.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
CHECK
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
3-39
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
If the Light Is Flashing
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
Reducing vehicle speed.
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
* Avoiding hard accelerations.
other than those of the same Tire Performance
b
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to comeon.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
3-40
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off,
wait at least 10 seconds and restad the engine. if
the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On
Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer
or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is on Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filhg Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine
may not run as efficiently as designed since small
amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a
misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should
correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel
cap properly. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. It will
take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
U I - I iuii
~
i a ~ kui iile pruper iuei iu iurrl iile iiyili uii.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
3-41
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CHECK
ENGINE light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-42
A warning chime and the DIC message LOW OIL
PRESSURE may also come on.
These indicate that oil is not going through your engine
quickly enough to keep it cool. The engine could be
low on oil, or could have some other oil problem. Have
it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on briefly when the ignition
is on but the engine is not running. The light will
come on as a test to show you it is working, but the
light will go out about five seconds after you turn
the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
Cruise Control Light
I n’t keep dri 1g .he oil pressui - _ _ _ _ _
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
.~
._
__’
CRUISE
I
United States
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Canada
The CRUISE light comes on whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under Turn
SignaVMultifunction Lever on page3-6.
This light will come on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition key to ON to let you know it is working.
3-43
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, your fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left.
When you have less than 3.5 gallons (13.2 L) of fuel
remaining, the DIC message LOW FUEL will be
displayed and a chime will sound. You need to get more
fuel right away.
3-44
The tank is not necessarily empty when the gage
reads empty. There is a reserve of about
1.5 gallons (5.6 L) in the tank. You should still get
more fuel as soon as possible.
Driver Information Center (DIG)
To turn off messages on the DIC (except LOW OIL
PRESSURE, LOW BRAKE FLUID, PARK BRAKE SET,
STARTING DISABLED and the HOT...STOP ENGINE
warning), press the RESET button.
Pressing the SELECT right arrow button will allow you
to access the following modes, DATE/ET, FUEL, ECON,
OIL and GAGE. While in any sf these modes, warning
messages can interrupt and take over the display
until you acknowledge the message, or the condition
causing the problem goes away.
English/Metric
The DIC can display information in either English or
metric. To change the display, press and hold the
ON/OFF button for about three seconds. This will also
change the digital screen for the climate control
system between English and metric.
Date/Elapsed Time
The DIC has different display modes which can be
accessedbypressingthefour
buttons on the DIC.
These bcttsns
s)?!!sFF, SELECT rinht
arrow, SELECT down arrow and RESET. The functions
of these buttons is explained in the following sections.
I'LJ',L
Pressing the SELECT down arrowwhile in BATE/ET
mode will allow vou to choose between the date and the
elapsed time menus.
Turn the system on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
button once. When you turn on the ignition, the DIC will
be in the mode last displayed ?..lhen the engine \":as
turned off.
3-45
Date
Elapsed Time (ET)
To set the date, press and hold the RESET button for
about three seconds while the date is being displayed on
the DIC. When the date set mode is entered the
display will show the following:
When the ignition is on, the DIC can be used as a
stopwatch. The display will show hours and minutes.
The elapsed time indicator will record up to 100 hours,
then it will reset to zero and continue counting. Press
SELECT down arrow while in the DATE/ET mode, and
the display will show the amount of time that has
elapsed since the elapsed time indicator was last reset
(not including time the ignition is off), such as:
YEAR?
MM/DD/OO
The year will be flashing. To increase the item that is
flashing press SELECT right arrow. To decrease
the item that is flashing press SELECT down arrow.
When you reach the current year press the RESET
button. The DIC will ask for the month. The month will
flash the same as the year. Use the SELECT buttons to
reach the current month and press RESET. The DIC
will then ask for the day. The day will flash the same as
the year. Use the SELECT buttons to reach the
current day. Press the RESET button again and the set
display will stop flashing and go back to the normal
operation mode.
01 :08 ELAPSED TIME
To start or stop the counting of time, press the RESET
button briefly. If the colon (:) in the time is flashing,
time is being counted. Time is displayed in hours and
minutes. Seconds are not displayed. Time will continue
to be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if
another display is being shown on the DIC.
To reset elapsed time to zero, press the RESET button
for three seconds while theelapsed time is displayed.
Fuel
Press the SELECT down arrow while in the FUEL mode
to see how much fuel has been used and the fuel
range functions.
3-46
Fuel Used
Fuel Economy
While in the FUEL USED function the display will show
a reading such as:
Pressing the SELECT down arrow while in the ECON
mode displays average fuel economy and instantaneous
fuel economy calculated for your specific driving
conditions.
FUEL USED: 10.4GAL or FUEL USED: 39.4 L
To learn how much fuel will be used from a specific
starting point, first enter the FUEL USED mode to
display FUEL USED, then press and hold the RESET
button for three seconds.
Don't confuse fuel used with the amount of fuel in
your tank.
Average fuel economy will be shown in a reading
such as:
25.2AVG MVGAL or 9.3AVG UlOO KM
Instantaneous fuel economy will be shown in a reading
such as:
28 INST MVGAL or 8.4 INST UlOO KM
Fuel Range
The FUEL RANGE mode calculates the remaining
distance you can drive without refueling. It's based on
fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.
The display will show a reading such as:
FUEL RANGE: 235 MI or FUEL RANGE: 378 KM
I4 the
II
L
I
I
;c.
IQ
r n m c ~ e
IUIIYU
~
1 e c . c . +hnn iZn -;le~ ~ L I Ia
U I I ad w I I I I I
The average fuel economy is viewed as a long-term
approximation of your overall driving conditions.
If you press and hold RESET for three seconds in this
mode while you're driving, the system will begin figuring
average fuel economy from that point in time.
Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
+he A : m n l m . ,
/ O n I,-\
\ w w 1x1111, L I I O
ulayluy
L ~
will read LOW FUEL RANGE.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannd be reset.
3-47
Oil Life
The GM Oil Life SystemTMis the only function accessible
in the OIL mode. Engine oil life is displayed in a
reading such as the following:
OIL LIFE 30%
This is an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It
will show 100% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alert
you with this message:
CHANGE OIL SOON
Always reset the OIL LIFE reminder after an oil change.
To reset the oil life system, see “How to Reset the
Oil Life System” under Engine Oil on page 5-75.
3-48
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed. It
can’t be reset accurately until the next oil change.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. If you drive in dusty areas, change your
oil after every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever occurs first, unless the DIC instructs you
to do so sooner. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine. So,
be sure to check your oil level often. See Engine Oil on
page 5- 15.
Gage
Tire pressure status, such as the following:
Pressing the SELECT down arrow while in GAGE mode
will allow you to access the battery volts, oil pressure
and tire pressure displays. Pressing and holding
the RESET button for three seconds while in average
speed and tire pressure displays will reset them.
Pressing the SELECT down arrow in GAGE mode will
show the following displays:
TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL or TIRE
PRESSURE LOW
TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL appears when the
check tire pressure system believes your vehicle’s
tire pressures are normal. if a potential tire
pressure problem is detected, the display will show
TIRE PRESSURE LOW. If you seethis message,
you should stop as soon as you can and check
all four tires for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 5-70. Also check the tire
pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. See
lnflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
There are times when you will have to reset
(calibrate) the check tire pressure system. Pressing
the RESET button while the TIRE PRESSURE
LOW warning is displayed does not automatically
reset the tire pressure monitoring system. See
Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-62 for more
information.
Battery voltage, such as the following:
VOLTS: 13.8
0
Oil pressure, such as the following:
OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or OIL PRESSURE
276 KPA
Average speed, such as the following:
AVG SPEED 55 MPH or AVG SPEED 90 KM/H
3-49
DIC Warnings and Messages
I
Other messages or warnings may appear in the DIC
display. For Canadian drivers, in addition to the
DIC message your DIC will display EXP with a number
after it which reflects the following messages:
I
I
I
EXP
Warning Message
(Export ID)
1 AIR BAG PROBLEM
3
CHANGE OIL SOON
4
CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM
5
I CHECK OIL LEVEL
6
TRANS HOT...IDLE ENG
7
I CONFIRM TIME & DATE
8
DRIVERS DOOR AJAR
9
ENGINE HOT...A/C OFF
10
HOT...REDUCE ENG RPM
11
HOT...STOP ENGINE *
12
ISYSTEM
THEFT
FAULT
13
LEFT REAR
DOOR
AJAR
I
3-50
I
I
I
I
I
I
I LOW OIL PRESSURE *
I
I
17
I
I
I
(ExE% ID)
Warning Message
18
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
LOW WASHER FLUID
19
20
PARK BRAKE SET*
21
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
22
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
23
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
24
TURN SIGNAL ON?
25 ATTEMPTED
I THEFT
26
[ SERV
STABILITY
SYS
27
I HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED
TRUNK AJAR
28
29
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
HOT...IDLE ENGINE
32
33
STARTING DISABLED*
36
CHECKGASCAP
STABILITY ACTIVE
42
I
TheEXPcodesareusedtomaketranslationfrom
English to other languages easier.
Pressing the RESET button willremove the above
messagesorwarningsfromtheDICdisplay,unless
noted by an asterisk (*).
I
I
CHECK OIL LEVEL - 5: If you ever see the CHECK
OIL LEVEL message, it indicates that the engine oil level
is 1 to 1 1/2 quarts (0.9 L to 1.4 L) low. The message
will appear only if the engine is running and it has been
at least eight minutes since the engine was last
running. If the message appears, check the oil dipstick
level. If it reads low, your oil level should be brought
up to the proper level. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
After bringing the oil to the proper level, the ignition must
be off for eight minutes to allow the majority of oil to
drain into the oil pan.
SERV STABILITY SYS - 26: If you ever see the SERV
STABILITY SYS message, it means there may be a
problem with your stability enhancement system. If you
see this message, try to reset the system (stop; turn
off the engine; then start the engine again). If the SERV
STABILITY SYS message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. You should see your dealer
for service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
STABILITY ACTIVE - 25: You may see the STABILITY
ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). It means that an advanced, computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue
to go in the direction in which you’re steering. This
stability enhancement system activates when the
computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to
spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery
spot on the road. When the system is on, you may
hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This
is normal.
When the STABILITY ACTIVE message is on, you
should continue to steer in the direction you want to
The system is designed to help you in bad weather
or other difficult driving situations by making the most of
whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY
ACTIVE message comes on, you’ll know that something
has caused your vehicle to start to spin, so you should
consider slowing down.
3-5 1
DIC Vehicle Personalization
The DIC can be used to program the following personal
choice features available with your vehicle:
Automatic Door Locks
Window Lock Out
Security Feedback
Delayed Locking
Perimeter Lighting
Driver ID
Memory Seats
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
To access the personalization menu, the vehicle must
be in PARK (P) with the ignition in ON and no warning
messages displayed on the DIC. You must then
press and hold both of the SELECT buttons for three
seconds. This will display the personalization menu.
The DIC display will show the following:
FEATURE PROGRAMMING
PRESS SELECT DOWN TO
SELECT MENU OPTIONS
PRESS SELECT RIGHT TO
CHANGE SETTINGS
3-52
The next item to be displayed is DRIVER 1 or
DRIVER 2. To change the driver number, press the
SELECT right arrow. The driver number that you select
should correspond with the number on the backof
your remote keyless entry transmitter. Once the correct
driver number has been selected, press the SELECT
down arrow to enter your choice and move on to
the next selection.
The DIC is used to program the personal choices of two
drivers. The drivers are recognized as DRIVER 1 and
DRIVER 2. You will let the DIC and the vehicle
know which driver you are by using your remote keyless
entry transmitter or by pressing the appropriate
memory seat button located on the driver’s door or
choosing the driver with the DIC. Each remote keyless
entry transmitter was pre-programmed to belong to
DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2. The personalization features
may be programmed differently for each driver.
When you press the unlock symbol on the transmitter,
the DIC will automatically change driver numbers
and the vehicle will recall the personal choice settings
that were last made to correspond to your transmitter,
including your radio and comfort control settings.
See Climate Controls Personalization on page 3-29.
If you unlock the vehicle using the door key instead of
the transmitter, the personal choice settings will
correspond to the previous driver of the vehicle as
identified by the transmitter, the memory seat control or
the DIC. If this happens and you were not the last
driver of the vehicle, press the correct driver number on
the door panel for the memory seats, press the
unlock symbol on the transmitter or select the
personalization programming mode and choose the
correct driver number.
After you have the correct driver number on the display
use the SELECT down arrow button to scroll through
the following messages and feature options:
DOORS LOCK IN GEAR
-
YES/NO
DOORS UNLOCK - YES/NO
ALL DOORS IN PARK - YES/NO
ALL DOORS AT KEY OFF - YEWNO
DRIVERS DOOR IN PARK - YES/NO
DRIVERS DOOR KEY OFF - YES/NO
PASS WINDOW LOCKOUT - YES/NO
KEY FOB FLASH LIGHTS - YES/NO
e
KEY FOB CHIRP HORN
e
DELAY LOCK OF DOORS - YES/NO
-
YES/NO
PERIMETER LIGHTS - YES/NO
EXT LIGHT TIMEOUT - 5 to 30 Seconds
DISPLAY DRIVER ID - YES/NO
KEY FOB MEMORY SEAT - YES/NO
DRIVING POSITION - YES
EXIT POSITION - YES
TILT MIRROR REVERSE - YES/NO
If you would like to exit the selection mode without
moving through each of the personal choice features,
simply press a different button on the DIC or turn off the
ignition. The personal choices you made will still be
retained, even without passing through each of
the features. In order for your personal choices to save,
you must press the SELECT down arrow after making
your selections.
If you happen to move past a selection you would like
to make a personal choice for, press unlock on the
transmitter or press the appropriate driver number on
.
ii~euuur parlei iur iile rllerllury seais. I 111swiii
return you to the beginning of the optional feature
programming mode.
TI.
A description of each feature programmable through the
DIC follows.
3-53
Automatic Door Locks
ALL DOORS IN PARK - YES/NO
You can program the automatic door lock feature to
change to one of the following modes:
ALL DOORS AT KEY OFF - YES/NO
Mode 0: No automatic door lock or unlock.
DRIVERS DOOR KEY OFF - YES/NO
Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). No automatic door unlock.
Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically
unlocks when shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when shifted
into PARK (P).
Mode 4: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically
unlocks when the key is turned to OFF.
Mode 5: All doors automatically lock when shifted out
of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when
the key is turned to OFF.
You can change the mode your vehicle is in by different
selections of the following DIC displays:
DOORS LOCK IN GEAR - YES/NO
DOORS UNLOCK - YES/NO
3-54
DRIVERS DOOR IN PARK - YES/NO
Press the SELECT right arrow button to toggle between
your choices and change the settings. Press the
SELECT down arrow button to store your changes in
memory and move on to the next selection.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 0 ,
select NO for DOORS LOCK IN GEAR. Your door locks
will operate normally with no automatic feature.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 1, do
the following:
1. Select YES for DOORS LOCK IN GEAR.
2. Select NO for DOORS UNLOCK.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 2, do
the following:
1. Select YES for DOORS LOCK IN GEAR.
2. Select YES for DOORS UNLOCK
3. Select NO for ALL DOORS IN PARK.
4. Select NO for ALL DOORS AT KEY OFF.
5. Select YES for DRIVERS DOOR IN PARK.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 3, do
the following:
1. Select YES for DOORS LOCK IN GEAR.
2. Select YES for DOORS UNLOCK.
3. Select YES for ALL DOORS IN PARK.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 4, do
the following:
1. Select YES for DOORS LOCK IN GEAR.
2. Select YES for DOORS UNLOCK.
3. Select NO for ALL DOORS IN PARK.
4. Select NO for ALL DOORS AT KEY OFF.
5. Select NO for DRIVERS DOOR IN PARK.
6. Select YES for DRIVERS DOOR KEY OFF.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 5, do
the following:
Window Lock Out
The number of passenger windows locked out by the
window LOCK switch can be programmed through
the DIC.
Press the SELECT right arrow button to toggle between
your choices and change the settings. Press the
SELECT down arrow button to store your changes in
memory and move on to the next selection.
If you select YES for PASS WINDOW LOCKOUT, all
three passenger window switches will be locked
out when the window LOCK switch is on.
If you select NO for PASS WINDOW LOCKOUT, only
the two rear passenger window switches will be
locked out when the window LOCK switch is on.
For more information on this feature, see “Window Lock
Out” under Power Windows on page 2-18.
1. Select YES for DOORS LOCK IN GEAR.
2. Select YES for DOORS UNLOCK.
3. Select NO for ALL DOORS IN PARK.
4. Select YES for ALL DOORS AT KEY OFF.
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-12
for more information about this feature.
3-55
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 1, do
the following:
Security Feedback
You can program the security feedback feature to
change to the following modes:
Mode 1: No feedback when locking or unlocking the
vehicle.
Mode 2: Parking lamps and the DRL will flash twice
when unlocking the vehicle and flash once when locking
the vehicle.
Mode 3: Horn chirps when all doors are unlocked
(second unlock button press) and when locking
the vehicle.
Mode 4: Parking lamps and the DRL will flash twice
each time the button with the unlock symbol is pressed;
the horn chirps when all doors are unlocked. Parking
lamps and the exterior lamps flash once and the
horn chirps when locking the vehicle.
You can change these modes by different selections of
the following DIC displays:
KEY FOB LIGHTS FLASH - YES/NO
0
KEY FOB HORN CHIRP
-
YES/NO
Press the SELECT right arrow button to toggle between
your choices and change the settings. Press the
SELECT down arrow button to store your changes in
memory and move on to the next selection.
3-56
1. Select NO for KEY FOB LIGHTS FLASH.
2. Select NO for KEY FOB HORN CHIRP.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 2, do
the following:
1. Select YES for KEY FOB LIGHTS FLASH.
2. Select NO for KEY FOB HORN CHIRP.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 3, do
the following:
1. Select NO for KEY FOB LIGHTS FLASH.
2. Select YES for KEY FOB HORN CHIRP.
If you would like to program your vehicle to Mode 4, do
the following:
1. Select YES for KEY FOB LIGHTS FLASH.
2. Select YES for KEY FOB HORN CHIRP.
For more information on this feature, see “Security
Feedback under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-6.
Delayed Locking
The delayed locking feature, which delays the actual
locking of the vehicle, can be made active or inactive
through the DIC. When DELAY LOCK OF DOORS
appears on the display, use the SELECT right arrow
button to toggle between YES and NO. When you have
made your choice, press the SELECT down arrow
button to record your selection and move on to the next
choice.
For more information on this feature, see Delayed
Locking on page2-1 1.
Perimeter Lighting
When the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, the DRL, parking lamps and
back-up lamps will turn on if it is dark enough outside.
You can control activationof this feature by choosing
YES or NO when the PERIMETER LIGHTS choice
is displayed on the DIC. Make your choice by pressing
the SELECT right arrow button and record your
choice by presslng the SELECT aown arrow bution.
You will then be promptedto choose a TIMEOUT period.
The EXT LIGHTS TIMEOUT feature can be changed to
the desired setting by using the SELECT right arrow
button to toggle from 5 to 30 seconds. Each toggle will
increase the time by five seconds. Once the desired
timeout is displayed, press the SELECT down arrow to
record your choice and move on to the next personal
choice feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Perimeter
Lighting” under lnterior Lamps on page 3-77.
Driver ID
This feature displays the driver ID, as identified by the
DIC. If you choose YES when DISPLAY DRIVER
ID is shown on the DIC, the driver number will be
displayed every time the ignition is turned on. If
you choose NO when DISPLAY DRIVER ID is shown
on the DIC, the driver number can be displayed by
pressing either a button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a memory seat button.
3-57
Memory Seats
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
This feature recalls the position of the driver’s seat.
When this feature is active, the memory seat and mirror
positions will be recalled for the identified driver when
the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to enter the
vehicle.
The parallel park assist mirror, which tips the passenger
mirror while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), can be
made active or inactive through the DIC. When
TILT MIRROR REVERSE appears on the display, use
the SELECT right arrow button to toggle the arrow
between YES and NO. When you have made your
choice, press the SELECT down arrow button to record
your selection. For more information on this feature,
see Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 2-48.
You can program this feature to be active by choosing
YES when the KEY FOB MEMORY SEAT choice
appears, or inactive by choosing NO when the KEY
FOB MEMORY SEAT choice appears on the DIC. Make
your choices by pressing the SELECT right arrow
button and store them in memory by pressing the
SELECT down arrow button.
You can also program this feature to recall your
memory seat position or the exit seat position. Select
YES for KEY FOB MEMORY SEAT then use the
SELECT right arrow button to toggle between DRIVING
POSITION - YES and EXIT POSITION - YES. When
the desired position is displayed on the DIC, press
the SELECT down arrow button to save that position in
memory and move on to the next selection.
For more information on this feature, see Memory Seat
and Mirrors on page 2-48.
3-58
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle - like a tape player,CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment that
has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Find out what your audio system can do and
how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting
the most out of the advanced engineering that went
into it.
four vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-23.
Setting the Time
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. The letters AM or PM will also appear. Then,
press and hold MN until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time may be set with the ignition on
or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold HR and MN at the same time until UPDATED
appears on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display
instead.
3-59
Radio with Cassette and CD
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV,
select OFF.
Finding a Station
Standard Radio - [email protected] Not Shown
Playing the Radio
POWER: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
3-60
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
<
>
SEEK
: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations to stations that are
in the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
< SCAN > : Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and you
hear a beep. The radio will go toa station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET
SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep
and the P will blink with the preset number. The radio
will go to the first preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM.
six FMI and six FM2), by performing the following
sieps.
3. 1-une in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best
suits the type of station selected.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO button until
BASS, MID or TREB appears on the display. Press the
knob above the AUDIO button to extend it, then turn
the knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least two
seconds will return all tone settings, including balance
and fade to flat.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3-61
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalizer): Press this button to
choose bass, midrange and treble equalization
settings designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical program types.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until MANUAL appears on the display. Then you
will be able to manually adjust the bass, midrange
and treble using the AUDIO button.
If your vehicle has the Bose radio, the AUTO EQ button
will work the same, except ,the radio will display EQ1
through EQ6 as the choices instead of displaying
the equalization setting names. These settings can be
used while listening to the radio or the CD player.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until
FAD appears on the display. Press the knob above the
AUDIO button to extend it, then turn the knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least
two seconds will return all tone settings, including bass
and treble to flat.
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
Using this system, the radio can do the following:
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Press the knob
above the AUDIO button to extend it, then turn the
knob to move the sound toward the left or the right
speakers.
3-62
e
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
e
display messages from radio stations, and
e
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. PTY will be displayed
on the screen and the light next to the button will
turn on. The last selected PTY will appear on
the display for five seconds.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found,
NONE FOUND will appear on the display.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt on. An asterisk will appear next to
the PTY name (for example CLASSICAL*). When
you are listening to a compact disc, the last selected
RDS station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format
is broadcast.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a
category by performing the following steps:
1 . Press the P-TYPE button. PTY will be displayed on
the screen and the light next to the button will turn
on. The last selected PTY will appear on the
display for five seconds.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
It a station with the seiectea PT-Y is not iouna.
NONE FOUND will appear on the display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular station.
3-63
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the
cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
Setting Preset PTYs
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons have
factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
1. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE
select mode.
button to activate program type
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-64
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to seek to a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements. TRAF will appear
on the display. If no station is found, NO TRAF will
appear on the display.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted. If you want to insert a
tape while the ignition is off, first press the button with
the eject symbol on it or the RCL knob.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or a
compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or
the compact disc player is being used, play will stop
during the announcement.
If an error appears on the radio display, the tape won’t
play because of an error. See “Cassette Tape
Message” later in this section.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If
you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not
be in squarely. Press the eject button, located next to
tne cassette tape siot, to remove tne tape ana start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, POWER,
AUDIO, AUTO EQ, and the SEEK controls just as
you do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and
an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing. The
tape piayer automaticaiiy begins piaying the other
side when it reaches the end of the tape.
1 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. You
may select stations during reverse operation by using
the TUNE knob.
2 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. You may select stations during
forward operation by using the TUNE knob.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
tu
AUTO tu (Automatic tqualizer): press AUTO
to
select the desired equalization setting while playing
a cassette tape. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a cassette tape. See “AUTO EQ’
listed previously for more information.
3-65
< SEEK > : Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for seek to
work. Press the right or the left arrow to search for
the next or the previous selection on the tape. You can
skip as many as nine selections up or down on the
tape. Choose how many selections you want to skip,
then press the right or left SEEK arrows that many
times. The number of selections to be skipped
will appear on the display.
<
>
SCAN
: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and SCAN
appears on the display. The tape will go to the next
selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
selection. Press this button again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TP CD (TAPE): Press this button to play a cassette
tape or a CD when listening to the radio. Press TP CD
to switch between the tape and compact disc if both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening. The display will
show the TAPE and CD symbols.
If you have the optional CD changer and it is loaded,
the TP CD button will activate the changer and a symbol
will be lit on the display.
3-66
A
(Eject): Press this button, located next to the
cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
TIGHT TAPE: When this message is displayed, the
tape is tight and the player can’tturn the tape hubs.
Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down
and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a
pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not
turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should
not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure
your player is working properly.
BROKEN TAPE: If this message is displayed, the tape
is broken. Try a new tape.
WRAPPED: When this message is displayed, the tape
is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get the
cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN PLAYR (Clean Player): This message may
also appear on the radio display to indicate that
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you shouldclean it as soon as possible
to prevent damage to the tapes and player. For
additional information see Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player on page 3-74.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
1 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
2 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You wiil hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
Playing a Compact Disc
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random mode.
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when
the ignition is off, first press the eject button or the
RCL knob.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalizer): Press this button to
select the desired equalization setting while playing a
compact disc. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a compact disc. See “AUTO EQ”
listed previously for more information.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will
he activated each time yo11play a (70
SEEK
: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. It
you hold this button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the disc.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages’’ later in this section.
<
>
3-67
< SCAN > : Press and hold either arrow for more
A
than two seconds until you hear a beep and SCAN
appears on the display. The disc will go to the next
track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next track. SCAN and the track number will appear on
the display. Press this button again to stop scanning.
Compact Disc Messages
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change what
is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed
time), press the knob until you see the display you want,
then hold the knob until the display flashes. While
elapsed time is showing, EL TM will appear on the
display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing.
TP CD (Tape): Press this button to play a cassette
tape or a CD when listening to the radio. Press TP CD
to switch between the tape and compact disc if both
are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening. The display will
show the TAPE and CD symbols.
If you have the optional CD changer and the CD
changer is loaded, the TP CD button will activate the
changer and a symbol will be lit in the display.
3-68
(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
NavigatiodRadio System
Your vehicle may have the optional navigation radio
system that includes Radio Data System (RDS) which
will seek out the kind of music you want to listen to. The
radio system can also communicate with your
navigation system to broadcast announcements on
traffic and emergency alert communications. For
information on how to use this system, see the
"Navigation/Wadio System" supplement.
3-69
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play
up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may
be played using the trays supplied in the magazine.
not play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray
back into the magazine slot until it locks into place.
Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the
magazine.
The small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds
one disc. Slide the button on the back of the magazine
and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays
from top to bottom, placing a disc on the tray label side
up. If you load a disc label side down, the disc will
3-70
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer.
Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of
the arrow marked on top of the magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
pushbuttons except for ejecting the magazine.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the compact disc symbol will appear on
the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the
magazine for CDs, the compact disc symbol will flash on
the display until the changer is ready to play. If CD
changer mode is entered during initialization, LOADING
will appear on the display. When a CD begins playing,
a disc and track number will be displayed. The disc
numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.
Playing a Compact Disc
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the right. If the
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate
and an error will occur. When the door is closed,
the changer will begin checking for discs in the
magazine. This will continue for up to two minutes
depending on the number of discs loaded.
1 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses,
elapsed time will be displayed with a flashing arrow to
help you find the correct passage.
2 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
ac;.v.ai7G~e
.“.vjt;-,ji-la ti.&-..k.
$-lecE ad.v.ai-,c;es,
&
A
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.
elapsed time will be displayed with a flashing arrow to
help you find the correct passage.
3-71
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to play the
tracks on the discs in random, rather than sequential,
order. If you press SEEK while in the random mode,
discs and tracks will be scanned randomly. Press this
button again to turn off the random feature and return to
normal operation.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to select the next disc in
the magazine. Each time you press SIDE, the disc
number will be displayed.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see what track is
currently playing. Press RCL again within five seconds
to see how long the track has been playing. EL TM
will appear on the display when in elapsed time mode.
When a new track starts to play, the track number
will also appear. Press RCL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
<
>
< SCAN > : Press and hold the right arrow until
SEEK
: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous tracks on the disc.
SCAN appears on the display. The disc will scan to the
next track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next track. Press this button again to stop scanning.
To scan a few seconds of each loaded disc, press and
hold the right arrow for two seconds until P SCAN
appears on the display. Press SCAN again to stop
scanning.
3-72
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing.
TP/CD (Tape): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. You can also press this button to
switch between playing a cassette tape, a CD and
the CD changer.
Compact Disc Errors
If an error appears on the display, an error has occurred
and the compact disc temporarily cannot play.
The CD changer will send an error message to the
receiver to indicate:
PLAYER OPEN: CD Changer Door Open.
Completely close the door to restore normal
operation.
NO CD’S: CD Changer Cartridge Empty. Try the
magazine again with a disc loaded on one of
the trays.
CHECK CD #: If this error message is displayed while
trying to play a CD in the compact disc player or
changer, the following conditions may have caused the
error:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error number, write it down and provide it to your
dealership when reporting the problem.
If your vehicle has this feature it will enable two drivers
to store and recall personal settings for radio presets,
last tuned station, volume, tone and audio source (radio,
cassette or CD).
The memory buttons (1 or 2) for this feature are located
on the driver’s door panel and correspond to the
numbers (1 or 2) found on the back of each remote
keyless entry transmitter.
To recall audio sources, press the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter and turn the ignition
on. The source last listened to will be recalled for
the identified driver (1 or 2).
To program this feature, do the following:
1. Set all radio preferences. For more information see
“Setting Preset Stations” and “Setting the Tone”
listed for your particular radio.
3. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you
hear two beeps. The beeps confirm that your
selection has been saved and can now be recalled.
Follow these steps each time you want to change the
stored settings.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
[email protected] designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed and the
radio is placed in a different vehicle. This feature
requires no user input to be activated. It is automatically
armed when it is put into the vehicle for the first time.
When the radio is turned off, the blinking red light
indicates that [email protected] armed.
If [email protected] activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED and a red
LED indicator light will come on above the
THEFTLOCK” logo to indicate a locked condition. If this
occurs, the radio will need to be returned to the
dealer.
2. Locate the memory buttons on the driver’s door
panel.
3-73
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
With this feature, you can
control certain radio
functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
A VOL (Volume) v : Press the up or the down arrow
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
to increase or to decrease volume.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
A SEEK: Press this button to seek to the next radio
station. When playing a cassette tape or compact disc,
press this button to hear the next selection. There
must be at least a three-second gap between selections
on a cassette tape.
PROG (Program): Press this button to tune to the next
preset radio station. When playing a cassette tape,
press this button to hear the other side of a tape that is
playing. When listening to a disc in the CD changer,
press this button to select the next loaded disc.
3-74
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
PLAYR to indicate that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If
this message appears onthe display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged
tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from
being ejected, use the following steps.
Care of Your CDs
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TP CD button for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset theCLEAN PLAYR
indicator. The radio will display CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by graspin9 the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-75
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Diversity Antenna System
Your AM-FM antennas are located in the windshield and
rear window. Be sure that the inside surfaces of the
windshield and rear window are not scratched and that
the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with
radio reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the
antenna connectors at the top-center of the front
windshield and the rear window need to be properly
attached to the posts on the glass.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting. The metallic film
in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort
the incoming radio reception.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield or rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear defogger grid and
affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations
clearly. This repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour
warranty.
3-76
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true,
the grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone
to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto
the glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid
lines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular
telephone antenna over the grid lines.
Chime Level Adjustment
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be
controlled by the radio. To change the volume level,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the
radio power off. The chime volume level will change
from the normal level to loud, and LOUD will be
displayed on the radio. To change back to the default or
normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again.
The chime level will change from the loud level
to normal, and NORMAL will be displayed.
4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving .......................................... -4-2
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-5
4.6
Braking .........................................................
Traction Control System (TCS) ........................ -4-8
Steering ...................................................... 4.10
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4.13
Passing ....................................................... 4.13
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-15
Driving at Night ............................................4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18
City Driving ..................................................
4-21
Freeway Driving ........................................... 4.22
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4.24
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................
4.26
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...4-32
Towing ..........................................................
4.33
Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... 4-33
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................... 4.33
Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4-34
Towing a Trailer ........................................... 4.36
4- 1
Defensive Driving
the floor - makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull
off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These
simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up Vdith a SAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat !aver I3P.C !eve!.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
4-4
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right
answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person haa
not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Drinkingand t n d ing is verydangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgement can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious-or
even fatal-collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
4-5
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-8.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
4-6
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking
- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if
you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away.
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page3-36.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
4-7
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear a
motor or clicking nosie during a hard stop, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
4-8
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
TRAC
ON
United States
TRAC
OFF
Canada
United States
Canada
This light will come on when your traction control
system is limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
System Active Light on page 3-38.
This light should come on briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving,
there’s a problem with your traction control system.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-37. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on page 3-6.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out”
under If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-32.
4-9
To turn the system off,
press the TC button on the
center console.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic-Speed Variable Assist
Steering
The traction control system warning light will come on
and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button, the warning light will come
on - but the system won’t turn off right away. It will
wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit
wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The traction control system
warning light should go off.
4-10
Your vehicle is equipped with a steering system that
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at
all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking,
yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
If you have [email protected],you may see the STABILITY
ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center. See
“Stability Active Message” under DIC Warnings and
Wlessages on page 3-50.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then
~
I slddenly
I
accelerate. Both control systems -
steering and acceleration - have to do their work where
the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration
can demand too much of those places. You can lose
control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.
4-1 1
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turr! your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
4-13
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
4-14
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you wouldlose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
e
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time 011
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
e
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
e
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
LOSSof Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-15
If you have [email protected],you may see the STABILITY
ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center. See
“Stability Active Message” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-50.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired
- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
4-16
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cui uwwr I wrI yiare irur.11 i~lt=aiiiar-~lps,
but they dku
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-18
Wet brakes can cause accidents. .-2y won't
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
I_
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puuuies. Eui ii yuu mrl'i, i r y iu siuw ciwwrl beiure yuu
hit them.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you're going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
4-19
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops
“dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Nofice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water thatis
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can’t avoid deep puddles or standingwater,
drive through them very slowly.
Flowing or rushing waterc r e a k strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowingwater can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other
vehicle occupants could drown.Don’t ignore
police warning signs, and otherwisebe very
cautious about trying to drive through flowing
water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-60.
4-20
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
C I M ~ V
ant
U I I lVUl I L
n f trQf3in nn thnm
V I
LI U I I I U
VI I
L l l b l II.
V
n
g
~’11
I VU I I
tar-nt
V V U I IL
tn t ” n n t n h n s n t 4 n r
C V
V V U L U I I
V U L
IVI
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
4-2 1
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-22
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re notfresh - such as after a day’s
work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
vou can easilv drive in.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the resewior full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and wiiiing to heip if you need it.
4-23
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
e
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
e
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
e
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-24
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
.L (N) orwiththe
Coasting dc nh in NE1
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the workof slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well.You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine runningand your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
~QI-I~
engine zssis, y ~ h r~~ k er ssn 2 Sben
Idownhill slope.
4-25
Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
Winter Driving
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-26
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-27
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to
be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,
you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-8.
h
4-28
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have the anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any slippery
road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface ofa curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. -You snouia probabiy stay witn
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
@
Turn on your hazard iiasners.
4-29
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-30
nun your engme only as lorig as yuu must. I tlls saves
car. -~,.
ex-._.ust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could
overcome you and killyou. You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any thatis
blocking your exhaust pipe.And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
-..- ..
C
.
.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-31
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above35 mph
(55 k d h ) as shown on the speedometer.
4-32
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-70.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn the system off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page4-8. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” following.
Towing
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-23.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle- such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a
Nofice: Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground will damage drivetrain components.
“dolly”).
\I
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
Dinghy Towing
-..-
.-1-:-1...-- ...- I - 1 - - : - - - - 1
I- I-- I -... ^ ^I ...:*I- - 1 1
z
I UUI VCIIlLlt: V V d 3 llUL UG31YI IGU 1U Ut: L U V V G U VVI11 I a l l IUUl
4-33
Dolly Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
1
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
CAP.
VEHICLE
I
d
e
A
U
n
U
OT, ADD 28KPA(4PSI)
'SMANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-34
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information
label found on the rear edge of the driver's door tells
you the proper size, speed rating and recommended
inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also
gives you important information about the number
of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight
that you can carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions.
DATE,
u
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
GAWR FRT
, GVWR ,
u
Czzl
-
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMSTO A L L a L
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Don't carry more than 176 Ibs. (80 kg) in your
trunk.
Do no- ad your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash.Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver's door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for yourvehicle, or the Gross
B v l n \A/nigh,
..
Rating ((=_A.!l\!R> fer either the !rent c)r
rear axle.
I
.,\IV
Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
V.
4-35
If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else - they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a cra-", they'll keep going.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It is automatic - you do not need to
adjust anything.
Towinn a Trailer
Things you phL inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicleso that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
4-36
If you don't use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only
if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
--
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the informationin “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
That’s the reason for thispart. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
0
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
f
0
the weight of the trailer,
^:.%La
”,:I,”
^_.%..^
11 l
e ...
welyl I1 UI 11 le ildllel iUl lyue
LL,
,
I
.
4.L.
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-37
Weight of the Trailer
rlow heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 Ibs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5171
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
4-38
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. if they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body OT
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-33. Dit-! and water can also enter the
vehicle.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
4-39
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer
lighting system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear
lamp connector. This connector is located under the
carpet in the rear corner of the trunk compartment.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
4-40
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or Other ObJeCtS.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-41
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
r-Irking on Hills
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
4-42
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
4-43
P
P
P
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................ -5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ...................................................... 5-4
Fuel ................................................................ 5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5-5
California Fuel ............................................... 5-6
Additives .........................................
......5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................... 5-7
Filling Your Tank ........................................ 5-7
Filling a Portable
Fuel Container . . . . .
.5-11
Checking Things Under
the Hood .................................................... 5-12
Hood Release .............................................. 5-13
Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5-14
Engine Oil ................................................... 5-15
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................ 5-21
P,L!tSrn2.tlC Tr2!ns2x!n !=!!lid ............................. .E;-33
-Engine Coolant ............................................. 5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-28
Engine Overheating ....................................... 5-28
Cooling System ............................................ 5-31
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 5-37
Spare
.Windshieid .Washer Fiuid ................................ 5-36
~
Brakes ........................................................ 5.39
Battery ........................................................ 5.42
Jump Starting ............................................... 5-44
Headlamp Aiming ..............................
......5-50
Bulb Replacement ......................................... -5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................. -5-54
Headlamps .................................................
-5-55
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ..................................... 5-58
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5-58
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .............. 5-59
Tires .............................................................. 5-60
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ................................ 5-60
Check Tire Pressure System .......................... 5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires ....................... 5-65
Buying New Tires ......................................... 5-66
I I.-:+-
UIIIIUIIII
T.
n. ._I.&.
. n.--I:__
_.
I Ilt: U u d l l l y
uldullly
..........................
r e 7
d-UI
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................. 5-68
Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-68
Tire Chains .................................................
-5-70
I f a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-70
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-71
Compact
Tire ...................................... 5-81
5- 1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ......................................
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ...............
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
Weatherstrips .............................................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ............
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Finish Damage ...........................................
UnderbodyMaintenance ..............................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .........
5-2
-5-82
.5.82
.5.84
.5.84
.5.85
.5.87
.5.87
.5.87
-5-87
.5.88
Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5.90
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................. 5-90
Service Parts Identification Label .................... 5-90
Electrical System ........................................... 5-91
Add-on Electrical Equipment .........................
5-91
Headlamp Wiring .......................................... 5-91
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5-91
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-91
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-92
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion ...................5-95
Capacities and Specifications ........................ 5-100
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-101
Service
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-9.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6- 16.
You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attemptany vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or falloff. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenanceof your vehicle.
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
87 or higher. However, for best performance and for
trailer towing, you may wish to use middle grade
or premium unleaded gasoline. If the octane is less than
87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you
drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine.
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to contribute to clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Filling Your Tank
Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
check the !!x! 2xi!2bi!i?;, 2:sk 2 R 2ztc C ! k , cr
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
?2
5-7
To open the fuel door,
press the button located
on the driver’s door
trim near the trunk release
button.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-8
The ignition does not need to be on. The remote fuel
door release will work in all transaxle positions.
The trunk release lockout switch must be in OFF for the
fuel door to open.
The fuel door can be opened manually in case of a
power failure. To do this, first open the trunk. The
release mechanism is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle, at the top of the trunk compartment.
Pull the tab toward you to
release the fuel door.
I
Notice: Prying on a locked fuel filler door can
damage it. Use the remote fuel door manual release
located in the trunk in the case of a power failure.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the
rinht
a
'3'
'*.
5-9
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happen if your tankis
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-85. When filling the tank
do not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after the
pump shuts off.
5-10
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-39.
The CHECK GAS CAP DIC message will come on if the
fuel cap is not properly reinstalled.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank
and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel *ontair - r
0
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
not filcontainer
wh it is i _idea
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the fillingis complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
~
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-1 1
Checking Things Under
the Hood
/t\ CAUTION:
I
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start afire. These include liquids likefuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned.Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot
engine.
An electric fan under the hood can startup
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and toolsaway
from any underhood electric fan.
I
5-12
I
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle, located to the
left of the steering
wheel under the
instrument panel.
A!!
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
5-13
2
3
vi
(D
3
co.
3
(D
(D
3
3
0
Q
0
0
5
(D
3
3
(D
0
U
Y
(D
S
I
.
A. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
C. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
D. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
F. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
G. Remote Negative (-) Terminal
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap
I. Engine Oil Dipstick
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir
K. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
L. Engine Air CleanedFilter
.
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
me;lns y n need
~ ~ to check
your engine oil level right away. For more information,
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-50.
instnJment chster, it
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-15
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is
located near the front of
the engine compartment.
The top of the dipstick
is a round yellow loop. See
Engine Companlment
Overview on page 5-14 for
more information on
location.
5-16
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you’ll need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5- 100.
The engine oil fill cap is
located near the front of
the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14
for more information
on location.
Nofice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE
OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
7
If youchoose
c
i*
4
C
n,
1
to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be
sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
HOT
WEATHER
/
-
"C'
OF
+ 100 - - +38
+80--
+27
+60--+16
+40-
-+4
t20---7
0---18
I
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOTUSE SAE IOW-40, SAE 2MN-50 OR ANY OTHER
VISCOSITY GRADEOIL NOT RECOMMENDED
5-18
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as
SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 2OW-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM [email protected] meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAF OW-30 nil Roth will prnvide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil
Life SystemTM)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come
on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the
next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the ysk?!??!??estbe reset. !t Is a!sc iy!crtm! ?c
check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the ei! is changed.
5-19
How to Reset the Oil Life System
What to Do with Used Oil
The GM Oil Life SystemTMcalculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Always reset the engine Oil Life System to 100% after
every oil change. It will not reset itself.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment.If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
To reset the OIL LIFE reminder, do the following:
1. With the ignition on, press the SELECT right arrow
on the DIC until you enter the OIL mode. The
current OIL LIFE percentage will be displayed.
2. Press and hold the DIC RESET button for about
five seconds. After five seconds, the display will
show OIL LIFE XXX%. If OIL LIFE XXX% does not
appear on the display after about five seconds,
see your dealer for service. After you release the
DIC RESET button, OIL LIFE 100% will appear
on the display.
5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
4. Install a new engine air cleanedfilter if needed.
5. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the cover.
Be sure the tabs of the cover fit into the slots of the
housing.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4 to determine when to replace the air filter.
I
The engine air cleanedfilter is in the engine
compartment on the driver's side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more
information on location.
I o check or replace the englne air cleaner/tilter do the
following:
1. Unscrew the two wing screws on the outboard side
of the housing cover.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleanedfilter.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops
it isn't there
flame if the engine backfires. If
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don't drive with it off, and be careful working
off.
on the engine with the air cleanedfilter
If tkn a i r mlnannrN;l+mu
;e
k.+mrM;m m m n
umcIummcImramIccm
u u u u n m m a c I v
u
m
m
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damageit.
Always have the air cleanerfiilter in place when
you're driving.
AI lVnbf #
i -YnC
-.
n
q
LDIW
UII
I-
VI#,
5-2 1
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4 for automatic transaxle fluid change intervals.
5-22
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic
-
especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may have to
drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
I
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
e
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched
area.
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transaxle fluid dipstick is located near
the front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-74 for more information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-23
How to Add Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
[email protected] coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only extended life coolant.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
1, Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
[email protected] will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
[email protected], because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than [email protected] is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Protect against rust and corrosion.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in this
section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-24
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than [email protected] added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
-- at 30,000miles
(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than [email protected] not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half [email protected] which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
plainwater to yourcooling
Adding a
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as aicohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and [email protected]
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
ana crack ihe engine, raiiiaiur, b a k r
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-25
Checking Coolant
Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap - even a little - when the engine and
radiator are hot.
I
~
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle,
near the windshield. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-74for more information on location.
5-26
I
The vehicle mustbeon a level surface.Whenyour
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the cold
level mark.
I\
I
Youcan be burlyouspill
coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure the arrow
lines up with the tube.
If the LOW ENGINE COOLANT DIC message comes
on and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture at the surge tank. but only when the
engine is cool.
5-27
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
The cooling system pressure cap is located on the
surge tank.
Notice: Your cooling system pressure cap is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. Your Driver Information
Center (DIC) will also display messages about engine
overheating. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 3-38.
5-28
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
message HOT STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a loss in power and engine performance.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting
any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in the
Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if yousee or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engineis
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for
information on driving to a safe place
in an
emergency.
5-29
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem. See “Low Coolant
Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-50.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stopafter high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Towa trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-30
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still
have the warning, turn offthe engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed
previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
I
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
S . Two Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-31
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is leak.
a
If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.That
could cause an enginefire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
A low coolant level should be indicated by a LOW
ENGINE COOLANT message on the Driver Information
Center. If it is, you may have a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
5-32
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by yourwarranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode’’ in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
- at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than [email protected] not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL COLD fill
mark line (4.5 inches (11 cm) from the top of the filler
neck), add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
[email protected] at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
n r m n n l ~ v nrr-n
pIcIaauIcI
;r.
uuy, I d
rrnnl hnfnm
vvvl
UcIIUIb
I r n t l
yvu
A n it
uv
IL.
Cnn
UcIU
Steam and scalding Ii ids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap even a little they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if youever have to turn
the pressure cap.
--
--
Enn;nn
L I l y l f ICI
Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
5-33
With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hotbut you wouldn’t get
the overheat warning. Your engine could catch
fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a
50/50mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX [email protected]
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant IT-:-’=-e.
1
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine partsare hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hotengine.
I
I
5-34
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. You can
remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn and
tnen stop.
3. Then fill the coolant
surge tank with the
proper mixture, to the
FULL COLD fill
mark line (4.5 inches
(11 cm) from the top of
the filler neck).
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-35
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches about 4.5 inches
(11 cm) from the top of the filler neck.
5-36
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrow
on the pressure cap lines up like this.
Power Steering Fluid
I
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is near the center
of the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for more
information on location.
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid !eve! on the
dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
~
n ~ r linrlie-tn
rl
II I U # ” U L ”
““UlU
Q
LA
nrnhlnm
y3VuI-I
I I.
Uq~,n
thn
I I U V U
L I 1-
r r r r r t n m
eyer-I
II
innnn-+mA
I1 I q J b U L b U
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-74 for reservoir location.
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
a
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
a
Don’t mix water with ready-to-usewasher fluid.
Water can cause the solution tofreeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page5-14 for reservoir
location.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full.
5-38
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank ifit is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Brakes
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
Brake Fluid
A
DOT3
b
1
Your master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s side of
the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page5-14
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir mightgo down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is don - I n the brake hydraulic sys’- -n
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. A chime will sound if you try
to drive with this warning light on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-35.
5-39
What to Add
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have tobe replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kindof fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-75.Use new brake fluid from a
sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from enteri-- the reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
5-40
9
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If
you do, wash it off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
Notices Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes won’t work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6- 14.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
5-4 1
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system - for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If
you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The
braking performance you’ve come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
[email protected] When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-42
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. To
access the battery, see Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion on page 5-95. You don’t need to access the
battery to jump start your vehicle. See Jump Starting on
page 5-44.
- - ~ t t e r y- . ~isn’t
t
properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into thearea under the rear
seat cushion. These fumes can damage your
rear seat safety belt systems. You may not be
able to see this damage, and the safety belts
might not provide the protectionneeded in a
crash. If a replacement battery is ever needed,
it must be vented in the
same manner as the
original battery. Always make sure that the
vent hose is properly reattached before
reinstalling the seat cushion.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive you vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your-battery from
running down.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to
the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the
floor pan (E).
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-73.
5-43
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to d t safely.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be d gerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
1
~
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-44
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehiclescan be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle In PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and the negative (-) terminal locations
on that vehicle.
Open the hood on your vehicle and find the remote
positive (+) terminal located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
5. To access the remote
positive (+) terminal,
remove the cover.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger
seat. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote positive (+) terminal
is for that purpose.
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
I
Your vehicle has a remote negative (-) terminal,
u
n
r
.~n
I I I ~ I K W J UIAU,
~utiaiecjr e a r iile puwer sieering
fluid reservoir.
..I.
.I
11
I
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
for more information on location.
5-45
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded.Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.You
don’t need to add water to the [email protected]
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. Ifit is low, add water
to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-46
Fans or other moving engine partscan injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engineis running.
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the
negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
remote positive (+)
terminal of the
dead battery. Use a
remote positive
(+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
8. Don’t let the other end
touchmetal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use aremoteon
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
I
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the negative (-)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (-) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step.Theother end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go
to the dead battery. It goestoaheavy,
unpainted
metal engine part or to aremote negative (-) terminal
the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-47
10. Connect the other end
of the negative (-)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and the
chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle has a remote negative (-) terminal
marked “G ND.”
5-48
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
I
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Dead Battery or Remote positive (+) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote positive (+) or Remote
Negative (-) Terminals
C. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (-) Terminal
5-49
Headlamp Aiming
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim
has been preset at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. This is true even though your
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the
“ 0(zero) marks on their scales.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers (for
horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high
beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that
you take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
as described in the following procedure.
5-50
The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 Ibs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low beam
lamps. The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed
if the
low
beam
lamps
are
aimed
properly.
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near
the headlamps.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal (lefvright)
adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming procedure. I f
you
believe
your headlamps
need
only vertical
jupiaownj aajustment, ioiiow oniy tne verticai aiming
procedure.
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn
the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the
indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 [email protected]
socket or T15 Torxascrewdriver.
5-51
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical
aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low beam
lamps.
I2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each lamp; if left low beam, subtract two
inches. Record this distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
5-52
--
-
I
/
.-
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to theheadlamp.
Turn the vertical aiming
screw (C) until the
headlamp beam
is aimed to the
horizontal tape line.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
5-53
Bulb Replacement
Halogen Bulbs
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-58.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
5-54
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Headlamps
1. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly
2. Use a large screwdriver by the outside mount to
separate the lamp assembly from the outboard
snap mounting pin. Slide the headlamp assembly
outward and lift it out.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the headlamp
assembly.
5-55
4. Lift the tabs to remove the bulb from the assembly.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Push the bulb assembly in and turn it clockwise to
install the bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly.
7. Then reconnect the wiring harness to the lamp
assem bly.
5-56
8. Slide the lamp assembly back into place by lining
up the track on the bottom of the assembly with
the guide on the vehicle.
9. Then connect the outboard snap mounting pin.
IO. Secure the lamp assembly with the two bolts.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Tip the headlamp assembly and while pressing the
release, turn the bulb and socket counterclockwise
to remove them.
Once the headlamp assembly has been removed from
the vehicle, the front turn signal and parking lamps
can be accessed. See Headlamps on page 5-55
for more information on location.
2. Replace the bulb in the socket.
3. Then reconnect the socket wiring harness to the
lamp assembly.
4. Reinstall the headlamp assembly into the vehicle.
5-57
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the trunk.
2. Turn the screws located inside of the trunk
counterclockwise and remove them.
3. Remove the plastic trim piece from the trunk.
4. Pull the carpeting away from the rear corner of the
trunk.
5. Remove the three nuts holding the lamp in place
and remove the lamp assembly.
6. While pressing the release, turn the bulb socket
assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
7. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the
socket.
8. Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to reinstall
the lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
StotiTaillamDs
Turn
Rear
Signal Lamps
3057
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
I-
5-58
~
I
1
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
2. Push the tab on the wiper blade assembly and pull
the assembly down enough to release it from the
“U” hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the
assembly away from the arm.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “WiperBlade
Cheek” under Pari B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 6-9 for more information.
3. Remove the blade.
To replace the wiper blade assembly do the following:
1. Lift the wiper up from the windshield and set it
into the vertically-locked position.
4. To reinstall the wiper blade assembly, slide it over
the wiper arm to engage the “U” hooked end on the
wiper blade assembly. Pull up on the assembly
to lock it into place.
For the proper windshield wiper blade assembly
replacement length and type, see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Pan‘s on page 5- 101.
5-59
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Oldsmobile Warranty booklet for details.
Poorly IT
ined and ir--,---9erly L-3d tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more lik
to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
_ I
._...____
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-60
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
0
Check your tires once a month or more.
Too much flexing
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
Too much heat
woav to Check
Tire overloading
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Bad wear
0
When to Check
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Unusual wear
Bad handling
0
Roughride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-61
Check Tire Pressure System
The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large
change in the pressure of one tire. The system won’t
alert you before you drive that a tire is low or flat.
You must begin driving before the system will work
properly.
The LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if pressure difference
(low pressure) is detected in one tire. The check tire
pressure system may not alert you if:
more than one tire is low,
the vehicle is moving faster than 65 mph (105 km/h),
the system is not yet calibrated,
the tire treadwear is uneven,
the compact spare tire is installed,
tire chains are being used, or
the vehicle is being driven on a rough or
frozen road.
5-62
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on,
the check tire pressure system may not be working
properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lighton page 3-36.
The check tire pressure system detects differences
in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire
pressure. The system can alert you about a low
tire - but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance.
See Tires on page 5-60.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message appears on
the Driver Information Center, you should stop as
soon as you can and check all your tires for damage. If
a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page5-70.
Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as
you can. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one
or more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll need to reset
(calibrate) the check tire pressure system. You’ll
also need to reset the system whenever you rotate the
tires, buy new tires and install or remove the compact
spare.
Don’t reset the check tire pressure system without first
correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset
the system when the tire pressures are incorrect,
the check tire pressure system will not work properly
and may not alert you when a tire is low or high.
To reset (calibrate) the system:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2. Press the SELECT right arrow on the DIC until you
enter the GAGE mode. Then press the SELECT
down arrow until TIRE PRESSURE appears on the
display.
3. Press and hold the DIC RESET button for about
five seconds. After five seconds, the display will
show TIRE PRESSURE RESET. If TIRE
PRESSURE RESET does not appear on the
display after about five seconds, see your dealer for
service. After you release the DIC RESET button,
TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL will appear on the
display.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-65 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-68 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
The system completes the calibration process during
driving. Calibration time can take 45 to 90 minutes,
depending on your driving habits. After the system has
been calibrated, the system will alert the driver that
a tire is low, up to a maximum speed of 65 mph
(105 km/h).
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-63
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label.
Reset the Check Tire Pressure System. See Check Tire
Pressure System on page 5-62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See Wheel Nut Torque in Capacities and Specifications
on page 5- 100.
5-64
I
1
Rust or dirt on awheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirtoff. See “Changing a Flal
Tire” in the Index.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
0
0
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-65
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire's sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an "MS" (for
mud and snow).
IL....;
tires could cause yo^ .o lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-beltedtires), the
vehicle may not handle properly,and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use thesame size and type tires on
all wheels. It's all right to drive with your
compact spare, though. It was developed for
use on your vehicle.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
a
lr vehicle, the
Ifyouusebias-plytires
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing acrash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
I
5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction - AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaninGr or peak traction characteristics.
5-67
Temperature - A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-68
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
--
Used Rep'-cement '"'heels
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can't know how it's been used
or how far it's been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
ociometer caiibration, neaaiamp aim, bumper neigh,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71 for more
information.
5-69
Tire Chains
If your vehicle hasP235/55R17 size tires, don’t
use tire chains, there’s not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-70
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P235/55R17 size tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
”S” type chains thatare the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them
as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a tire can cause an in- y. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthestaway from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side of the vehicle, at the
opposite end.
5-7 1
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
b
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.
Instructions for changing your tires are on the inside of
the tire cover. You can rest the cover near you for
easy reference while you change the tire.
1. Lift the tire cover to gain access to the compact
spare tire and jacking equipment. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-81 for more information.
5-72
2. Remove the wheel wrench and jack from the jack
container.
Removing the Wheel Covers
3. Remove the compact spare tire from the trunk.
A
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B).
insert the hooked end of the wheel wrench in one of the
two small notches in the center cover and pry the
cover off. Do not drop the cover or lay it face down, as
it could be scratched or damaged.
5-73
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise by hand to
lower the jack head until it fits under the vehicle.
1. Position the wheel wrench securely over the wheel
nuts and turn the wrench counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts, but don't remove them.
2. Attach the wheel wrench to the bolt on the end of
the jack to create a jack handle.
5-74
I
I
4. Near each wheel well is a notch in the frame to
position the jack head. Position the jack under
the vehicle and raise the jack head until it fits firmly
against the sheet metal. Do not raise the vehicle
yet. Put the compact spare tire near you.
Raising ,-ur vehic-- _ _ _ _ h the jack imk.Jpe..,
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal
injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise on the jack. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so there’s enough room for
the compact spare tire to fit underneath the
wheel well.
.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
Getting u..-er a vehicle when it is ja,..ed
up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
5-75
7 . Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
I
I
8. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time.The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brushlater, if you needto, to
get all therust or dirt off.
5-76
9. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel
is held against
the hub.
If a nut cannot be tightened by hand, use the wheel
wrench, and see your dealer right away.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-77
11. Using the wheel
wrench, tighten the
wheel nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence as
shown.
Nofice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for thewheel nut torque
specification.
12. When the flat tire has been repaired or replaced,
reinstall the wheel cover. Be sure to position the
alignment pin on the cover with the notch in
the wheel. Apply pressure around the edge of the
cap to snap it in place. Do not use a hammer
or mallet to reinstall the cover.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification.See ”Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
5-78
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have
replaced the compact spare tire with a regular tire.
Notice: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your
compact spare, you could damage the cover or the
spare.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
I
E
B
C
...
St0 rg a jack, a tire or c...er equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this
section. See the storing instructions label to return
your compact spare tire into your trunk properly.
5-80
A. Wrench
B. Jack
C. Jack Container
D. Retainer
E. Compact Spare Tire
Cover
Compact Spare Tire
Don't use your compact spare on other vehicles.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(IO5 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. You must
calibrate the Check Tire Pressure System after installing
or removing the compact spare. See Check Tire
Pressure System on page 5-62. Of course, it's best to
replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
And don't mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won't fit. Keep your compact
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice; Tire chains won't fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don't use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don't
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
...
-_.:A - -_:I- I IIC L-w-r---l l l__J d-L L SlJ"'t:
- __ - __ - Gar1
- - __ ye1
nV Y l L l I yu1ue 1 4 1 1 3 .
Cauy~ll
:&I,
TL
-I
-.
I
.. -.
I
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-81
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
LaundrySoap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
0
Naphtha
FabridCarpet
0
Carbon Tetrachloride
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
Gasoline
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous - some more than
others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too
5-82
You can get GM - approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-88.
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can - before
they set.
0
0
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
0
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
0
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
+LI.I%;.1l.J
-
nrrrrl, I n )
W U U \ r L .
PI
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
5-83
Wood Panels
Care of Safety Belts
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page5-88.
Do not bleach or dye safetybelts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provideadequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Notice: Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scrapedoff later. If abrasive cleaners
Weatherstrips
are used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may bedamaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across the Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
defogger grid.
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 15.
5-84
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold
water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-88. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
^.
-. ..A- - - - - .-A ..
--..
d V U l U 5UI I d b G 5bI dlLI lG5 d l IU V V d l G l 3 c . ‘ u L L l l 1y.
.-:-I
---L-L.
I
.-L-
I-
-LA:.-
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water?a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-88.
If your vehicle has a “basecoatklearcoaf” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
pcsskle. ! I?ecesss?:;’, LIse !.?cI?-s!Xssb:e c!esners ths?
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
5-85
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
5-86
Tires
Notice; When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame! floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-87
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
(cont’d)
Description
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
I
I
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
I
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
I
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Use
on
chrome
or
Polish
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
5-88
I
Usage
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Odor Eliminator
Spot Lifter
Usage
Odorless swav odor
eliminator k e d on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6- 15.
5-89
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the underside of the spare tire
cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label is:
your VIN,
the modeldesignation,
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-90
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Nofice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse, If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the wiring harness. An electrical overload will cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain
cff.if this hqppns, hawe p 1 r headlamp system
checked right away.
5-91
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
The engine compartment
fuse block is located near
the front on the
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a [email protected] blow, see your
dealer for service immediately.
Comparfment Oiewiew on
page 5-14 for more
information on location.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the
same amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without - like the radio or cigarette
lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can. You will find a fuse puller
clipped in both of the fuse blocks. Snap the wide end
of the fuse puller at the side indentations and pull
the fuse out.
The [email protected] located in two fuse blocks, one
located in the engine compartment and the other under
the rear seat. If a [email protected] blow, have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.
5-92
Lift the cover to gain access. Fuse 22 or 23 can be
moved to the outer position to provide continuous power
to the accessory power outlet or cigarette lighter
when the ignition is not on. See your dealer for
additional assistance, if needed.
Leaving an accessory on for a long period of time can
drain the vehicle’s battery.
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
Usage
Not Used
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Not Used
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Spare
Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Usage
Powertrain Control Module Battery
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Ignition 1
Not Used
Transaxle
Cruise Control
Direct Ignition System
Injector Bank #2
Not Used
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Oxygen Sensor
Injector Bank #I
Auxiliary Power
Cigarette Lighter
Fog Lamps/Daytirne Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioning Clutch
5-93
Relays
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
5-94
Usage
High-Beam Headlamp
Low-Beam Headlamp
Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioner Clutch
HVAC Solenoid
Accessory
Air Pump
Starter 1
Cooling Fan 1
Ignition 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
Circuit
Breakers
41
Fuses
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Usage
Starter
Usage
Not Used
Empty
ABS
Air Pump A
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
To access the battery and rear compartment fuse
panels, the rear seat cushion must be removed. This
procedure is somewhat difficult. You may wish to have
your dealer dothis for you.
Notice: The battery and main fuse blocks are
located under therear seat cushion. The battery’s
ground terminal and some relay wires are exposed.
To help avoid damage to the battery and wires,
be careful when removing or reinstalling the seat
cushion. Do not remove covers from covered parts.
Do not store anything under theseat, as objects
could touch exposed wires and cause a short.
A safety belt that isn’t properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. ld the safety
belt hasn’t been routed through the seat
cushion at all, it won’t be there to work for the
next passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badlyinjured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to
be sure that the safety beltsare properly
routed and are not twisted.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the
vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
5-95
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is
located below the rear seat
on the driver’s side. The
rear seat cushion must be
removed to access the
fuse block. See Removing
the Rear Seat Cushion
on page 5-95.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Don’t let the safety belts get
twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
5-96
Fuses
1
3
3
4
5
6
7
a
9
10
Usage
Fuel Pump
HVAC Blower
Memory
ALDL
Rear Fog Lamps
Compact Disc (CD)
Driver's Door Module
Air Bag System
Not Used
Right Parking Lamp
Fuses
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
la
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
-38
-
29
30
31
32
33
34
Usage
Vent Solenoid
Ignition 1
Left Parking Lamp
Dimmer
Spare
Left Front Heated Seat
Not Used
Rear Door Module
Stoplamp
ParWReverse
Audio
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Not Used
Not Used
Passenger Door Module
Body
Interior Lamps
R!ct IlSPd
Ignition Switch
Instrument Panel
Right Front Heated Seat
Not Used
H'JAC
Ignition 3 Rear
5-97
5-98
Fuses
35
36
37
38
Usage
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Turn SignaVHazard
HVAC Battery
Dimmer
Relays
39
40
41
42
43
44
Usage
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamp
Ignition 1
Rear Fog Lamp
Not Used
Park
Relays
45
46
47
4%
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Usage
Reverse
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Fuel Tank Door Lock
Not Used
Ignition 3
Fuel Tank Door Release
Interior Lamps
Trunk Release
Front Courtesy Lamps
Not Used
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Circuit
Breakers
56
57
Usage
Power Seats
Power Windows
Relays
58
59
Usage
Cigar
Rear Defogger
Fuses
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
Usage
Not Used
Rear Defog
Not Used
Audio Amplifier
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Cigar
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuses
73
74
75
Usage
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
5-99
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in
English and metric conversions. Please refer to Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page6- 15
for more information.
Capacities
I
I
Application
Transaxle
I Automatic
I
I
Capacities
English
11 quarts
Metric
I
10.4 L
System
Engine Cooling
L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Wheel Nut Torque
7.0 quarts
6.7 L
18.5 gallons
2.2 Ibs
70.0 L
100 Ib-ft
140 N*m
1.0 kg
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
~
Engine
va ( ~ 4 7 )
5-100
Vin Code
C
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.050 inch (1.27 mm)
~ _ _ _ ~ ~ _ _ _ _
Firing Order
1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
I
41-987*
GM Part # 12571535
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades
Type
Length
1
Shepherd’s Hook
22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
I
*[email protected] number
5-101
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
~~~
~~
Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6.2
At Least Once a Year ................................... 6.10
Introduction ................................................... 6.2
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6.13
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2
Steering,
Suspension and Front Drive Axle
MaintenanceRequirements .............................. 6.2
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................ 6.13
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6.3
Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.13
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6.4
Fuel System Inspection .................................. 6.13
Maintenance
Using
Your Schedule
.......... ......6.4
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6.14
Scheduled Maintenance ......................
......6.5
Throttle System Inspection ............................. 6.14
Part B: Owner
Checks
Services
and
.................6-9
System
Brake
Inspection ................................ 6.14
AtFuel
Each
Fill ............................................ 6.9
At LeastOnce a Month ................................... 6.9
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-15
At LeastTwice a Year ................................... 6.10
PartE: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.16
,
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
.
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGEAS'.
RECOMMENDED
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
How This Section is Organized
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-9.
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer’s servicedepartment or another
qualified service center do thesejobs.
Perfor ng maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In tryingto do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for thejob. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil scheduled maintenance
which explains the engine oil life system and how
it indicates when to change the engine oil and filter.
Also, listed are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we don’t know exactly how
you’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few
times a week. Or you may drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands or in many other ways.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
6-4
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM
Oil Life SystemTM(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system.
See Part 5: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6- 13.
Footnotes
t
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty orlimit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle 's useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
periormea at tne inuicateti intervais anti tne
maintenance be recorded.
@ Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire
Pressure System must be reset.
+A good ti.me to check your brakes is duri.ng tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
nh-nnnr-4 q t Inrrrt
WI I U I uyuu U L I U U U L
th- r r n r r r t m m
nnnn q \ r n q v Qnrl rrt thio t;-m
u y u u l U I I U U L LI Ilr) t I I I I c , L I I c , G ) y r ) L O I l 1
V I lWcI
must be reset. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-15 for information on resetting the system.
6-5
After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in Part E of this schedule.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
deposits, open the throttle valve and inspect all
surfaces. Clean as required. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote 62.)(See footnote +.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control
Service.
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
An Emission Control Service.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
(See footnote +.)
information. (See footnote 0.)
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
D Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
6-6
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
Cl Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
Cl Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83000 km)
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and bottom screens
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any ofthese
conditions, change the fluidand filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation patternand additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control
Service.
67,500 Milles (112 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation patternand additional
information. (See footnote @.)(See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation patternand additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation patternand additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
deposits, open the throttle valve and inspect all
surfaces. Clean as required. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote t.)
6-7
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
deposits, open the throttle valve and inspect all
surfaces. Clean as required. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-63 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and bottom screens
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
6-8
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both
the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occursfirst).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
U Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page5-24 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or aservice station attendant to
perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don't forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
page 5-60 for further details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
c;eai-l
c-&sei;e
S;-,"&j st:du,
idPt: Ciearri1-,y
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio Systern(s)
on page3-59 for further details.
6-9
At Least Twice a Year
Automatic Transaxle Check
Restraint System Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-22. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if
needed.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
“Windshield Wiper and Wiper Blades” under Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6- 15.
6-10
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, glove box door, console door and any
folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to
a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Cher':
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
i i ihe siarier works in any oiiler pvsiiivrl, your
vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
!- stem Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but don't start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-1 1
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park ‘n’“lech-ism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-12
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or otherqualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-9.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-33.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
iirles artJ i~usesiur pruper i1uui.i-up, bit Idit 16,it=ai.is,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
6-13
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more oftenif your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
6-1 4
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
I
Usaae
I
I
8,"gFEi;
I
Ke Lock
inders
Y
I
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To determine
Engine Oil
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle's engine, see Engme Oil on
page 5- 15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only DEX-COOL
Engine Coolant water
Coolant. See Enqlne Coolant on
Floor Shift
Linkage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Sprin
Anchor
and elease
Pawl
w
FluidLubricant
DEXRON-Ill Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
GM Part10953474,
No. U.S.
Lanada
or 12346241, in
equivalent).
Lubri late Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part 0. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting re uirements of NLGl #2,
Cateqow L or GC-LB.
Lubri late Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part 0 . US. 12346293, in Canada
992723, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting re uirements of NLGl #2,
Category L or GC-LB.
L
a
R
a
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hoo~,a,ngde~oor
F anada
M Part No. U S
10953474,
. 12346241,
I
WindshieldGMOptikleenWasherSolventor
Washer Solvent eauivalent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U S . 12377985, in Canada
Parking Brake 88901242,
or equivalent) or lubricant
Cable Guides meeting requirements
of NLGl #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
power
No. US. i052884, in Canada
System
993294,
equivalent).
or
or
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Fuel Door,
Glove Box
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Door, Console Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Door and Rear
Compartment
Lid Hinges
6-15
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
6-16
MaintenanceRecord (cont’d)
MaintenanceRecord (cont’d)
6-18
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information ......................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................
Customer Assistance Offices .........................
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ...............................................
Roadside Assistance Program ......................
7.2
7.2
7.3
7.3
7.5
7.5
Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7.6
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ........................................... 7.8
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................... 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7.9
Service Publications Ordering Information ...........7.9
7- 1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Oldsmobile. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-442-6537. In Canada, contact GM of
Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
Dealership nameand location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Oldsmobile, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
Customer Assistance Off ices
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Oldsmobile has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with Oldsmobile by dialing:
1-800-833-OLDS (6537). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Oldsmobile encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S.customer wishes
to write to Oldsmobile, the letter should be addressed to
Oldsmobile’s Customer Assistance Center.
Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100
rhis prouram is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
United States
All Overseas Locations
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5171
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
1-800-442-6537
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-442-OLDS (6537)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U S . Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910 Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as areadriver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealerfor more details or call
!he Ghi hichi!i?;/ ,A*.cic?ancP fhntpr zt I -f2QQ-22!&w3n5"
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-442-OLDS (6537)
As the proud owner of a new Oldsmobile vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road.
Oldsmobile's Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by courteous and capable Roadside Assistance
Representatives who are available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
Fuel delivery
Lock-out service (identification required)
Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service
or in the event oi a venicie-aisabiing acciaeni
Flat tire change
Jump starts
Minor repairs to disabled vehicles
Assistance when vehicie is mired in sarsci, mud
or snow
7-5
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
Trip routing
Trip interruption expense benefits
0
Dealership locator service
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance specifically excludes
coverage for mounting, dismounting or changing of snow
tires, chains or other traction devices.
In some cases, where service is impractical, the driver
may be authorized to obtain other service for which
reimbursement is provided.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Oldsmobile’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
0
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
7-6
0
Vehicle license plate number
Oldsmobile reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Oldsmobile’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call
away. Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance:
1 -800-442-OLDS (6537), text telephone (lTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Oldsmobile has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation,a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
Transportation Options
Plan Ahead When Possible
Shuttle Service
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
ine work day as possibie io aiiow ior same day repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Oldsmobile
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement tor reasonable tuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-7
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
7-8
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportationat
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion,
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K I A ON5
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-442-6537, or write:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5171
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
7-9
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
7-10
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551 -41
23
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. 0. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Accessory Power Outlets .................................
3-21
AddingWasher Fluid .......................................
5-38
AdditionalProgramInformation ...........................
7-8
Additives,Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-on ElectricalEquipment ............................
5-91
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) .............. 3-62
Air Bag
ReadinessLight ..........................................
3-34
AirBagSystems .............................................
1-47
How DoesanAirBag
Restrain? ....................
1-52
Servicing YourAir Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-54
WhatMakesanAirBag
Inflate? ....................
1-52
What Will You See After an Air BagInflates? ...... 1-52
When Should an Air Bag
Inflate? ................... 1-51
Where Are the Air Bags? ..............................
1-49
AirCleanedFilter,Engine .................................
5-21
7-4
All Overseas Locations ......................................
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .................. 5-86
AM ...............................................................
3-74
Antenna, Diversity ...........................................
3-76
C?.,-+AII
A,-.+:
I ,.-I,
D.-~.I,A
It1-Iucln u1anG \ J Y Q L G I
r-11
/ A DC\
\nuw)
...........................
A
7
f - r
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-36
Appearance Care ............................................
5-82
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-84
Appearance Care (cont.)
5-87
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning the inside ofYour Vehicle ................ 5-82
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-85
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-87
GM VehicleCare/Appearance Materials .......... 5-88
Sheet Metal Damage ................................
5-87
Underbody Maintenance ........
........ 5-87
Weatherstrips ...........................
.... 5-84
Ashtrays .....................................
. . . . . . . . 3-22
Assist Handles ...............................................
2-45
3-59
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Systems
3-74
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Care ofYour Cassette TapePlayer ................ 3-74
Care ofYourCD Player ...............................
3-76
Care of Your CDs ........................................
3-75
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................
3-76
3-76
Diversity Antenna System .............................
NavigatiodRadio System ..............................
3-69
Personal Choice Radio Controls ....................
3-73
3-60
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
0 -LA:.-
-.
&I-
-
-r:.-I I t lit3
..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ..........................
~ e L l i l l yLIIt:
Understanding RadioReception .....................
n r n
3-a3
3-73
3-70
3-74
1
Automatic Climate Control System .....................
AutomaticDoorLocks .....................................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Level Control ...................................
Automatic Operation ........................................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transaxle Check ..............................
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System
Check ........................................................
3-23
3-54
3-16
4-36
3-23
Backing Up ....................................................
Battery ..........................................................
Battery Load Management ...............................
Battery Replacement .........................................
Battery Warning Light ......................................
Before Leavingon a LongTrip .........................
Body Lubrication Service ..................................
Brake
Parking ......................................................
System Inspection .......................................
SystemWarningLight ..................................
4-41
5-42
3-21
2-9
3-35
4-23
6-10
5-22
2-26
6-10
6-1 1
2-29
6-14
3-35
Brake Fluid ....................................................
5-39
BrakeWear ................................................... 5-41
Brakes ..........................................................
5-39
4-6
Braking ...........................................................
Braking in Emergencies .....................................
4-8
Break.ln.NewVehicle
.....................................
2-23
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-54
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-57
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-54
HeadlampAiming ........................................
5-50
Headlamps .................................................
5-55
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
5-58
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................
5-58
Buying NewTires ...........................................
5-66
C
California Fuel ..........................................
5-6
7-4
Canada ...........................................................
Canadian Owners ................................................
ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ...........................
7-6
Capacities and Specifications ..........................
5-100
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4.26.4.36.2.14.
2-33
Care of
Safety Belts ...........
... 5-84
Care of Your
Cassette Tape Player ...................................
3-74
CD Player ..................................................
3-76
CDS .......................................................... 3-75
CassetteTapeMessages ................................. 3-66
Cassette Tape Player Service .............................
6-9
CDChanger, Trunk-Mounted ............................
3-70
Chains, Tires ..................................................
5-70
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-39
Tire Pressure System ...................................
5-62
Check Engine Light .........................................
3-39
Checking Coolant ............................................
5-26
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
5-16
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
5-12
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
1-55
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
5-87
Child Restraints
ChildRestraintSystems ...............................
1-34
Infants and Young Children ...........................
1-30
Lower Andlorayes arid Tup Teiilers ior
Children(LATCHSystem) ..........................
1-40
Older Children ............................................. 1-28
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCHSystem ........................................ 1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..............................................
1-42
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
UnderbodyMaintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Exterior LampdLenses .......................
Climate Control System
Automatic ...................................................
Climate Controls Personalization ....................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
Steering Wheel Controls ...............................
Compact Disc Errors .......................................
Compact Disc Messages ..................................
Compact Spare Tire ........................................
Compass Calibration .......................................
Compass Operation .........................................
CompassVariance ..........................................
Control ofa Vehicle ..........................................
Convenience Net ............................................
1-44
1-38
1-39
1-37
3-76
3-22
5-82
5-85
5-87
5-84
5-85
3-23
3-29
3-27
3-28
3-72
3-68
5-81
2-35
2-35
2-36
4-5
2-46
3
Coolant
EngineTemperatureGage ............................
3-38
Heater. Engine ............................................
2-25
Surge Tank Pressure Cap .............................
5-28
Cooling System ..............................................
5-31
CourtesyLamps .............................................
3-18
Cruise Control ................................................
3-1 1
Cruise Control Light ........................................
3-43
Current and Past Model Order Forms
................ 7-10
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ..................................
7-6
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users .......................................................
7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ...........................
7-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .....................
7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................
7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
7-9
Government ..............................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................
7-8
Roadside Assistance Program .........................
7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ......... 7-9
4
Date/Elapsed Time .......................................... 3-45
Daytime Running Lamps ..................................
3-15
Defensive Driving .............................................
4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-26
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-18
Delayed Exit Lighting .......................................
3-19
Delayed Locking .....................................
2-11, 3-57
Dinghy Towing ................................................
4-33
Diversity Antenna ............................................
3-76
Doing Your Own Service Work ...........................
5-4
Dolly Towing ..................................................
4-34
Door
Central Door Unlocking System .....................
2-11
Delayed Locking ..........................................
2-11
Door Ajar Reminder .....................................
2-11
Locks ........................................................
2-10
2-11
Power Door Locks .......................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks .............................
2-13
Driver
Position, Safety Belt .....................................
1-14
3-57
Driver ID .......................................................
Driver Information Center
(DIC)
___
.......
DICVehicle Personalization ..........................
DIC
Warnings
and
Messages
..........
.......
Driving
At Night .....................................................
City ...........................................................
Defensive .....................................................
Drunken .......................................................
Freeway .....................................................
Hill andMountainRoads ..............................
In Rain and on Wet Roads
...........................
Winter ........................................................
Driving On Grades ..........................................
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...............
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................
Driving with a Trailer ....................................
3-45
3-52
3-50
4-16
4-21
4-2
4-2
4-22
4-24
4-18
4-26
4-42
4-28
4-20
4-20
4-40
E
ElectricalSystem
5-91
Add-on Equipment ...............................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
5-92
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
5-91
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-91
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
.................. 5-95
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
5-91
Emergency Trunk Release Handle .....................
2-16
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ................................................... 3-42
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
5-21
Battery .......................................................
5-42
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-39
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................
2-25
Coolant TemperatureGage ...........................
3-38
Cooling System Inspection ............................
6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
5-14
Exhaust .....................................................
2-33
Oil .............................................................
5-15
Overheating ................................................
5-28
Starting ......................................................
2-24
EngineCompartmentFuseBlock
......................
5-92
Engine Coolant Level Check ..............................
6-9
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-43
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
5-19
Engine Oil Level Check .....................................
6-9
Engine Oil ScheduledMaintenance .....................
6-5
Engine Specifications .....................................
5-100
Engiishiivietric .................................................
3-45
Entry Lighting .................................................
3-18
Erasing [email protected] ..............................
2-44
Express-DownWindow ....................................
2-18
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
1-27
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
3-14
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ..........................
3-17
5
F
FabricKarpet .................................................
5-82
Filter
5-21
Engine Air Cleaner ......................................
Finding aPTY Station .....................................
3-63
Finding a Station ............................................
3-60
Finish Care ....................................................
5-85
Finish Damage ...............................................
5-87
Flash-to-Pass ...................................................
3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................
5-70
Flat Tire,Changing .........................................
5-71
Floor Mats .....................................................
2-46
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle .....................................
5-22
Power Steering ...........................................
5-37
Windshield Washer ......................................
5-38
FM ............................................................... 3-74
3-16
FogLamps ....................................................
Following Distance ..........................................
4-40
Footnotes ........................................................
6-5
Front Reading Lamps ......................................
3-20
Front Storage Area .........................................
2-45
Fuel .......................................................
3-46, 5-5
Additives ......................................................
5-6
California Fuel ..............................................
5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................
5-11
Filling YourTank ...........................................
5-7
6
Fuel (cont.)
Fuels in Foreign Countries ..............................
Gage .........................................................
Gasoline Octane ...........................................
Gasoline Specifications ..................................
System Inspection .......................................
Fuel Economy ................................................
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Windshield Wiper .........................................
5-7
3-44
5-5
5-5
6-13
3-47
5-92
5-91
G
Gage ........................................................
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Garage Door Opener .......................................
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................
Specifications ...............................................
Gate Operator andCanadianProgramming ........
Glass Surfaces ...............................................
GloveBox .....................................................
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ....................................................
3-49
3-38
3-44
3-32
3-33
2-41
5-5
5-5
2-43
5-84
2-45
7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ...................................
3-4
Head
Restraints
.......................................
. 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming .......................................................
5-50
HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger ....................
3-7
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming .............................
5-51
Headlamp Vertical Aiming .................................
5-52
HeadlampWiring ............................................
5-91
5-55
Headlamps ....................................................
BulbReplacement .......................................
5-54
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-57
5-54
HalogenBulbs ............................................
3-15
Headlamps on Reminder ..................................
Heated Seats ...............................................
1-5
Highway
Hypnosis
.................................
... 4-24
................
... 4-24
Hill and
Mountain
Roads
Hitches .......................................................... 4-39
HomeLink Transmitter, Programming .................. 2-42
[email protected] Transmitter....................................
2-41
Hood
OL--I..---...
U I ICLRII ly I I Ill 1y3 V I I U G l ................................
5- I L
Release .....................................................
5-13
Horn ...............................................................
3-5
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank .. 5-33
5-24
How to Add Fluid ............................................
How to Check ........................................
5-22, 5-61
TI^:
I I--1-
A
m
How to CheckPower Steering Fluid .......
.... 5-37
How to Use This Manual ...................................
ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Hydroplaning ..............................................
4-19
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-30
If Steam Is Coming From YourEngine ............... 5-29
If the Light Is Flashing .....................................
3-40
If the Light Is on Steady .................................. 3-41
If YouAre Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-32
IfYou Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
4-37
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
4-29
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-23
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ..........................
6-12
3-20
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .......................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-30
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................
5-60
Inspection
Brake
System
..........................
........ 6-14
.... 6-14
Engine Cooling System .................
ExhaustSystem ..........................................
6-13
Fuel System ............................................... 6-13
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
6-13
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Bootand Seal .........................................
6-13
Throttle System ...........................................
6-14
7
Instrument Panel
Cluster ..............
....
....
........... 3-31
......... 3-2
Overview .....................................
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........
........... 3-17
Interior Lamps ............................................. 3-17
Interior Plastic Components ..............................
5-83
Jump Starting .................................................
5-44
Key Lock Cylinders Service ..............................
Key Reminder Warning ....................................
Keyless EntrySystem .......................................
Keys ...............................................................
6-10
2-24
2-5
2-3
L
Lamps
Exterior ...................................
....... 3-14
Interior .......................................................
3-17
Lap-§boulder Belt ...................................
1-14, 1-22
LATCHSystem
1-40
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCHSystem ........................................
1-42
5-83
Leather .........................................................
a
2-14
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle Withthe Engine Running ...... 2-31
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
3-34
Anti-Lock BrakeSystemWarning ................... 3-36
3-35
Battery Warning ..........................................
3-35
Brake System Warning .................................
Cruise Control .............................................
3-43
3-39
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-42
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
3-33
TCS WarningLight ...................................... 3-37
Traction Control System Active ......................
3-38
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-37
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror ............................... 2-18
4-34
Loading Your Vehicle .......................................
Lockout Protection ..........................................
2-14
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System .....................
2-11
2-11
Delayed Locking ..........................................
Door .......................................................... 2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................
2-14
Lockout Protection .......................................
2-14
2-11
Power Door ................................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks .............................
2-13
Loss of Control ...................
................ 4-15
Lumbar
Manual Controls ..........
............
.. 1-3
Power Controls .............................................
1-4
Magnetic-Speed Variable Assist Steering ............ 4-10
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-101
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 6-9
.......
............... 6-9
At Least
Once
Month
a
Least
At
Once a Year .....
.............. 6-10
6-10
At Least Twice a Year ..................................
BrakeSystemInspection ..............................
6-14
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-14
Exhaust System Inspection ...........................
6-13
6-13
FuelSystemInspection ................................
How This Section is Organized .......................
6-3
Introduction ..................................................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................
6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............... 6-9
PartC - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-13
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . 6-15
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................
6-16
ScheduledMaintenance .................................
6-5
cv---.-
-.
a t e G I II I Y ,
. .----- :-.a u q . ~ wI W W I I
-.--I
IU
I-
L
n ..f . . _ A . .I V n
~x ~
rl UI 11 U II
e
BootandSealInspection
..........................
6-13
ThrottleSystemInspection ............................
6-14
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
YourVehicle and the Environment ............... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing .....................
4-43
Making Turns ................................................. 4-41
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-39
1-3
Manual Lumbar Controls ....................................
3-24
Manual Operation ...........................................
1-2
Manual Passenger Seat ....................................
Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle ............... 2-8
Memory Mirrors ..............................................
2-48
2-48
MemorySeat .................................................
Memory Seats ................................................
3-58
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................
3-50
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
..... 7-4
U S. Virgin Islands) .......................
Mirror Operation .............................................
2-35
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass .... 2-35
2-48
Memory .....................................................
n on
A, ttcirla
hl;rrnr
1-30
.................................
2-37
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ....................
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................
2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ..............................
2-37
W
U
L
~
I
U
P n n r r n v
u t
I V U f i
U-
* V f f t tu t
9
Navigation System ......................................
3-69
2-23
New Vehicle Break-In ......................................
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-101
0
Odometer ...................................................... 3-32
Off-Road Recovery ..........................................
4-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
3-42
Pressure Light .............................................
Oil Life ..........................................................
3-48
1-28
Older Children, Restraints ................................
........................................ 2-39
[email protected]
[email protected] Personal Calling .................................
2-40
[email protected] ............................................
2-39
2-40
[email protected] Advisor ....................................
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................
3-27
Outside
Convex Mirror .............................................
2-38
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................
2-37
2-38
Heated Mirrors ............................................
Power Mirrors .............................................
2-37
10
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ........................
3-58
Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode ... 5-28
2-12
Overriding LockDelay .....................................
Owners,
Canadian
..............
.........................
II
Owner’s Information ....................................
7-10
Parade Dimming .............................................
3-19
Park (P)
2-30
Shifting Into ............................................
2-32
Shifting Out of ....................................
Parking
Brake ........................................................
2-29
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P)
MechanismCheck .......................................
6-12
4-42
Parking on Hills ..............................................
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services .................. 6-9
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-13
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 6-15
Part E - MaintenanceRecord ...........................
6-16
Passenger Temperature Control ........................
3-27
Passing .................................................
4-13, 4-41
[email protected] ................................................
2-21
[email protected] Operation ..........
................. 2-21
Perimeter Lighting ...............................
3.19. 3-57
Personalization.Climate Controls ......................
3-29
3-59
Personalization Features ....................................
2-7 Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-74
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
3-76
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Playing a Cassette Tape ..................................
3-65
3-75
Playing a Compact Disc .......................... 3-67, 3-71 Care of Your CDs ........................................
3-69
Navigation System .......................................
3-60
PlayingtheRadio ...........................................
3-73
Personal Choice RadioControls ....................
Power
3-60
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Accessory Outlets ........................................
3-21
3-59
Setting the Time ..........................................
Door Locks .................................................
2-11
3-73
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Electrical System .........................................
5-91
3-70
Trunk-Mounted
CD
Changer
..........................
LumbarControls ...........................................
1-4
3-74
Understanding Reception ..............................
Seat ............................................................
1-2
RainsenseTMII Wipers ..................................... .. 3-9
Steering Fluid .............................................
5-37
3-64
RDS Messages ..............................................
Windows .................................................... 2-18
Power Steering ...............................................
4-10 Rear Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-20
1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ......................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12
1-21
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts
..................
Programming the [email protected] Transmitter . . . . . . . . 2-42
2-46
Rear Storage Area ..........................................
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..............................
5-96
Rear Window Defogger ................................
3-26
U
Dimming
Automatic
Mirror,
Rearview
with
QuestionsandAnswersAbout
Safety Belts ......... 1-12
Compass ....................................................
2-35
n
11
Reclining Seatbacks ..........................................
1-5
Recreational VehicleTowing .............................
4-33
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Remote Trunk Release ....................................
2-15
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ..................................................
5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-72
5-73
Removing the Wheel Covers ............................
5-58
Replacement Bulbs .........................................
Replacing Brake System Parts ..........................
5-42
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ..... 1-56
Reporting Safety Defects
CanadianGovernment ................................... 7-9
General Motors .............................................
7-9
United States Government ..............................
7-8
Reprogramming a Single [email protected] ....... 2-44
Resetting Defaults ...........................................
2-44
Restraint System Check ...................................
6-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash .....................................................
1-56
Restraint Systems
1-55
Checking ....................................................
Replacing Parts ...........................................
1-56
Restraints, Head ...............................................
1-7
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ......................
2-24
12
Right Front PassengerPosition.SafetyBelts ...... 1-21
Roadside
Assistance Program .......................................
7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-32
Running YourEngineWhileYouAreParked
....... 2-34
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................
3-33
Safety Belts
Care of ..................................................
5-84
Driver Position ............................................
1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13
..... 1-12
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ......................................
1-25
1-21
RearSeatPassengers .................................
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
1-21
Safety Belt Extender ....................................
1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .........................
1-8
Safety Chains .................................................
4-39
Safety Warnings and Symbols ..............................
iii
Scheduled Maintenance .....................................
6-5
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................
1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual Lumbar .............................................
1-3
Manual Passenger .........................................
1-2
Memory .....................................................
2-48
PowerLumbar ..........................................
1-4
Power
Seats
..................
................... 1-2
RecliningSeatbacks ......................................
1-5
Securing a Child Restraint
Designedfor the LATCH System ................... 1-42
1-42
RearSeat Position ......................................
Right Front Seat Position ..............................
1-44
Security Feedback ....................................
2-8, 3-56
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-5
Sensors ......................................................... 3-25
Service ...........................................................
5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour
5-4
Vehicle ..................................................
5-4
Doing Your Own Work ...................................
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-39
7-9
Publications Ordering Information .....................
P - . - ..-- n . . I I - L . - /-1u
3 t i V i b t UUiIC11113 .............................................
7
Service Manuals ...............................................
SettingPreset Stations ....................................
Setting Preset PTYs ........................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
4
n
7-9
3-61
3-64
3-59
.... 3-61
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble) ...........
Sheet Metal Damage ........................
.... 5-87
Shifting Into Park (P) .......................................
2-30
2-32
Shifting Out of Park (P) ...................................
Skidding ........................................................
4-15
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips .......................
4-20
5-100
Specifications. Capacities ...............................
Speedometer ..................................................
3-32
Starter Switch Check .......................................
6-11
2-24
Starting Your Engine .......................................
Steering ........................................................
4-10
Steering in Emergencies ..................................
4-12
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection .....................................
6-13
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-11
Steering Wheel Climate Controls .......................
3-28
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio .........................
3-74
Storage Areas
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-46
Front Storage Area ......................................
2-45
Glove Box .................................................. 2-45
Rear Storage Area .......................................
2-46
.
- -....
~ L W I I I iI i ~- e rrat I I I ~ :a~lu loois ..........................
3 - f ~
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools .......................
5-80
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
4-32
Sun
Visors
...............................
........... 2-18
Sunroof ...................................
....... 2-47
n
1
P
l I ~
T
I
T
13
T
Tachometer .............................
. . . . . . . . 3-33
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
.... 5-58
TCS Active Light .............................................
3-38
3-37
TCS Warning Light ..........................................
2-20
Testing the Alarm ............................................
Theater Dimming ............................................
3-19
.... 3-73
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................
.... 2-19
.... 2-21
[email protected] ..........................
[email protected] Operation ...
....
.... 2-21
Universal Theft-Deterrent ..............................
2-19
Throttle System Inspection ...............................
6-14
Tilt Wheel ........................................................
3-5
Tire Inflation Check ...........................................
6-9
5-60, 5-86
Tires .....................................................
5-66
Buying New Tires ........................................
5-70
Chains .......................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ....................................
5-71
Check Tire Pressure System .........................
5-62
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-81
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
5-70
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ...............................
5-60
Inspection and Rotation ................................
5-63
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................
5-67
14
Tires (cont.)
..... 5-68
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .....
Wheel
Replacement
.........................
..... 5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires
.................. 5-65
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater ................ 2-25
5-83
Topof the Instrument Panel .............................
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-38
1-39
Top StrapAnchor Location ...............................
TorqueLock ...................................................
2-31
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-39
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .....
..... 4-33
Towing
Trailer
a
......................
..... 4-36
Your Vehicle ..............................
......... 4-33
Traction
3-38
Control SystemActive Light ......................
Control System(TCS) ....................................
4-8
3-37
Control SystemWarningLight .......................
Trailer Brakes .................................................
4-40
4-40
Trailer Wiring Harness .....................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ......................
............. 5-22
2-26
Transaxle Operation, Automatic .........................
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................
7-10
Transportation Options ........
................... 7-7
TripOdometers ..............................................
3-32
Trunk ............................................................
2-14
TrunkLockRelease ........................................
2-15
Trunk Release Lockout ....................................
2-15
Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals .......................... 3-6
TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever ...........................
3-6
.................. 4-41
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ...........................................................
Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................
Vehicle Storage ..............................................
Ventilation Adjustment ......................................
Vinyl .............................................................
Visors ...........................................................
3-52
2-48
5-43
3-27
5-83
2-18
U
Underbody Flushing Service .............................
UnderstandingRadioReception ........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
United States ...................................................
UsedReplacementWheels ..............................
[email protected] ...........................................
UsingRDS ....................................................
6-12
3-74
5-67
7-4
5-69
2-44
3-62
v
Vehicle
Cnntrc\! ........................................................
DamageWarnings ...........................................
Loading ......................................................
Symbols .........................................................
VehicleIdentification
Number (VIN) .............................................
Service Parts Ideniification Label ...................
4-5
iv
4-34
iv
5-90
5-90
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ................ 3-30
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................
3-50
Hazard Warning Flashers ...............................
3-4
3-5
OtherWarning Devices ..................................
...
Safety and Symbols .........................................
III
Vehicle Damage ..............................................
iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
5-85
Weatherstrip Lubrication .....
....................
6-10
Weight of the Trailer .........................
.... 4-38
Weight of the Trailer Tongue .............................
4-38
5-18
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................
What to Do with Used Oil ................................
5-20
What to Use ..................................
5-25, 5-37, 5-38
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
5-68
5-68
Replacement ...............................................
LVher; to Add Efigine Oil ..................................
1 7 4 7
15
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life SystemTM) ................................
When to Check ..............................................
When to CheckandChange ............................
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................
When YouAre Ready to Leave After Parking on
a Hill .........................................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
WhySafety Belts Work .....................................
WindowLockOut ...................................
2-18,
Windows .......................................................
Power ........................................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...........................
Windshield Washer .........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
16
5-19
5-61
5-22
5-37
4-43
1-37
1-9
3-55
2-17
2-18
5-86
3-10
5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
................. 6-9
Windshield Wiper
5-59
Blade Replacement ..................................
Fuses ........................................................ 5-91
3-8
Windshield Wipers ............................................
Winter Driving ................................................
4-26
Wiper Blade Check .........................................
6-10
Wiper-Activated Headlamps ..............................
3-15
Wood Panels .................................................
5-84
Your Vehicle and the Environment .......................
6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement